Veneta Multi-Use Pool Project Manual 5-19-17 1

PROJECT MANUAL FOR:
VENETA MULTI-USE POOL

VENETA MUNICIPAL POOL
25192 EAST BROADWAY
VENETA, OREGON
CITY OF VENETA
88184 8TH STREET
VENETA, OREGON
MAY 19, 2017

PROJECT TITLE PAGE - 00 01 01
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
PROJECT MANUAL FOR:
VENETA MULTI-USE POOL

Veneta Municipal Pool
25192 East Broadway
Veneta, Oregon
OWNER:
CITY OF VENETA
88184 8th Street
Veneta, Oregon 97487
Tel (541) 935-2191
Contact: Kyle Schauer
ARCHITECTS:
ROBERTSON/SHERWOOD/ARCHITECTS pc
132 East Broadway - Suite 540
Eugene, Oregon 97401
Tel (541) 342-8077
Contact: Scott Stolarczyk, AIA, CDT, LEED AP BD+C
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS:
HOHBACH-LEWIN
296 East Fifth Avenue, Suite 302
Tel (541) 349-1701
Contact: Jeremiah LeGrue, SE
MEP ENGINEERS:
SYSTEMS WEST ENGINEERS, INC.

411 High Street
Tel (541) 342-7210
Contacts: Steven Savich, PE - Mechanical
Matt Reich, PE - Electrical
DATE:
JUNE 19, 2017
END OF SECTION
Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 01 01 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Division 00 -- Procurement and Contracting Requirements
00 01 01 - Project Title Page
00 01 10 - Table of Contents
00 01 15 - List of Drawing Sheets
00 11 16 - Invitation to Bid
00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders
00 31 00 - Available Project Information
00 41 00 - Bid Form
00 43 12 - Bidder's Bond Statement
00 45 19 - Non-Collusion Affidavit
00 45 22 - First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form
00 52 00 - Agreement Form
00 61 13.13 - Payment Bond Form
00 61 13.16 - Performance Bond Form
00 72 00 - General Conditions
SPECIFICATIONS
Division 01 -- General Requirements
01 10 00 - Summary
01 23 00 - Alternates
01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule
01 40 00 - Quality Requirements
01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 60 00 - Product Requirements
01 60 01 - Substitution Request Form
01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training
Division 02 -- Existing Conditions
02 41 00 - Demolition
Division 03 -- Concrete
03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing

03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection
07 16 10 - Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing
07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
Division 09 -- Finishes
09 30 00 - Tiling
09 97 23 - Exposed Aggregate Pool Finish
Division 13 -- Special Construction
13 11 50 - Swimming Pool Equipment
Division 20 -- General Mechanical
20 05 00 - General Mechanical Provisions
20 05 13 - Motors for Mechanical Equipment
20 05 14 - Motor Control Devices for Mechanical Equipment
20 05 19 - Meter and Gauges for Mechanical Service
20 05 23 - General Duty Valves for Mechanical Service
20 05 29 - Pipe Hangers, Supports, Sleeves, and Seals
20 05 48 - Seismic Control for Mechanical Systems
20 05 53 - Identification for Mechanical Equipment
20 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for Mechanical
Division 22 -- Plumbing
22 07 00 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 11 02 - Plumbing Piping
22 51 13 - Swimming Pool Piping
22 51 16 - Swimming Pool Pumps
22 51 19 - Swimming Pool Water Treatment
22 51 23 - Swimming Pool Specialties
Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)
23 07 00 - HVAV Insulation
23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
23 21 19 - Hydronic System Specialties
23 57 19 - Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers
Division 25 -- Integrated Automation
25 10 00 - Building Automation Systems
25 30 00 - Field Installed Control system Components
25 90 00 - Automatic Controls Sequence of Operations

Division 26 -- Electrical
26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 29 - Pipe Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
26 28 16 - Overcurrent Protective Devices
26 29 13 - Motor and Circuit Disconnects
26 51 00 - Lighting Fixtures
Division 31 -- Earthwork
31 20 00 - Earth Moving
Division 32 -- Exterior Improvements
32 31 13 - Chain Link Fences and Gates
Division 33 -- Utilities
33 41 00 - Subdrainage
33 42 00 - Deck Drainage Systems
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS - 00 01 15
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
GENERAL
G100 Project Information
ARCHITECTURAL
A100 Site Demolition Plan
A101 Deck Drainage Plan
A102 Pool Plan, Pool Section
A301 Details
A302 Details
STRUCTURAL
S001 General Notes, Symbols, and Pool Foundation Plan
S501 Concrete Details
MECHANICAL
M001 Mechanical Legend & Schedules
M111 Pool Deck Plumbing Plan
M321 Sections
M421 Enlarged Plans
M422 Enlarged Plans
M501 Mechanical Details
M601 Diagrams
M602 Diagrams
ELECTRICAL
E001 Legend, Schedule, & General Notes
E100 Electrical Site Plan
E121 Power Distribution Plan
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS

INVITATION TO BID – 00 11 16
INVITATION TO BID
INVITATION TO BID
Contractors are invited to bid on the construction of the Veneta Multi-Use Pool (Project), located at the
Veneta Municipal Pool, 25192 East Broadway, Veneta, Oregon. Sealed bids will be received by Kyle
Schauer, Public Works Director, City of Veneta at 88184 8th Street, Veneta, Oregon until 2:00 PM on
Wednesday, October 11, 2017. Bids will be publicly opened at that location immediately upon closing.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
In general, the Project includes construction of a new multi-use pool at the existing Veneta Municipal Pool
located at 25192 East Broadway Avenue, Veneta, Oregon.
PRE-BID CONFERENCE
A non-mandatory pre-bid conference for Bidders will be held on Thursday, September 21, 2017 at 10:00
AM at the project site. All interested Contractors, Subcontractors, and Suppliers are invited to attend.
Statements made by the City’s representatives at the conference are not binding upon the City, unless
confirmed by written addendum.
BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Project Documents may be examined at the City of Veneta (City) office located at 8814 8th Street,
Veneta, OR 97487, between the hours of 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday and are
downloadable from the City website http://www.venetaoregon.gov.
The bidding documents will also be made available to the following Plans Centers:
Eugene Builders Exchange, Eugene, OR, 541-484-5331;
Daily Journal of Commerce Plan Center, Portland, OR, 503-274-0624;
Contractor Plan Center, Clackamas, OR, 503-650-0148;
Central Oregon Builder’s Exchange, Bend, OR, 541-389-0123;
Salem Contractor’s Exchange, Salem, OR; 503-362-7957;
Douglas County Plan Center, Roseburg, OR; 541-440-9030.
Bidders needing hard copies may purchase the documents from Central Print and Reprographic
Services, Eugene, Oregon.
PREQUALIFICATION
No prequalification will be required for this Project.
PREVAILING WAGE
This contract is for a public work subject to ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870 relating to the payment of
prevailing wages.
BID SECURITY
Bidder shall submit a Bid Bond, Certified Check, Cashier’s Check, Savings and Loan Secured Check or
irrevocable Letter of Credit issued by a financial institution for ten percent (10%) of the Bid amount plus
additive alternates.
NON-RESIDENT BIDDERS
In accordance with ORS 279A.120, Bidders will be required to indicate on the Bid Form whether or not
the Bidder is an Oregon resident.
CONTRACTOR’S REGISTRATION
Bids will not be considered unless the Bidder (Contractor) is registered and in good standing with the
Construction Contractor’s Board as required by ORS 701.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

INVITATION TO BID – 00 11 16
Asbestos work is not anticipated.
RIGHT TO REJECT PROPOSALS

Bids may be held by the City of Veneta for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days from date bids are due
for the purpose of reviewing bid documents and investigating qualifications of Bidders prior to awarding
Contract. The City of Veneta reserves the right to reject any Bid for good cause upon finding that it is in
the best interest of the City to do so.
Kyle Schauer, Public Works Director

City of Veneta
8814 8th Street
P.O. Box 458,
Veneta, OR 97487

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS – 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Each bid must be submitted in an opaque, sealed envelope, addressed to City of Veneta, at the above
address. Each bid must be plainly marked on the outside of the envelope with the name of the bidder,
the City’s address and “Name of Project.” Bids not so marked may be disqualified. If forwarded by mail,
the sealed envelope containing the bid must be contained in another envelope addressed to the City at
the address listed above. Faxed or electronically submitted bids shall be refused as non-responsive.
This contract is for a public work subject to ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870 relating to the payment of
prevailing wages.
No prequalification will be required for this Project.
A non-mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the time and location indicated in the Invitation to Bid.
Statements made by City representatives at that meeting are not binding on City unless confirmed by
written addendum.
All bids must be submitted on the required bid form. All blank spaces for bid prices must be completed in
ink and the bid form must be fully completed and executed when submitted. Only one copy of the bid
form is required. To be considered, each bid must be accompanied by a bid bond or certified check in the
amount of 10% of the bid.
Contractor must comply with all federal, state, and local laws or regulations dealing with the prevention of
environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources that affect the performance of the Contract.
1. Non-Compliant Bids
The City may reject any bid not in compliance with all prescribed public bidding procedures and
requirements. Any bid failing to certify compliance with ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870 et seq. will not be
received or considered by City. All bids must identify whether the bidder is a resident bidder as defined in
ORS 279A.120. The City may reject for good cause any and all bids upon finding it is in the public
interest to do so. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of bids, or
any authorized postponement per City Public Contracting Rule 137-049-0320. Any bid received after the
closing time and date specified above shall not be considered. No bidder may withdraw a bid within forty
(40) days after the actual date of the bid opening. Should there be reasons why the contract cannot be
awarded within the specified time, the time may be extended by mutual agreement between the City and
the bidder.
2. Bidder Responsibilities
Before submitting a bid, each bidder must:
(a) Examine the contract documents thoroughly;

(b) Visit the site, so that the bidder may familiarize itself with local conditions which may, in any
manner, affect cost progress, or performance of the Work;
(c) Be familiar with state, federal, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations which may, in any
manner, affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; and
(d) Study and carefully correlate bidder's observations with the contract documents.
3. Instructions for First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure
Bidders are required to disclose information about certain first-tier subcontractors when the contract value
for a Public Improvement is greater than $100,000 (see ORS 279C.370). Specifically, when the contract
amount of a first-tier subcontractor furnishing labor or labor and materials would be greater than or equal
to: (i) 5% of the Project Bid, but at least $15,000, or (ii) $350,000 regardless of the percentage, the
bidder must disclose the following information about that subcontract either in its Bid submission, or within
two hours after Bid Closing:
(a) The subcontractor’s name,

(b) The category of work that the subcontractor would be performing, and
(c) The dollar value of the subcontract.
If the bidder will not be using any subcontractors that are subject to the above disclosure requirements,
the bidder is required to indicate "NONE" on the accompanying form.
THE CONTRACTING AGENCY MUST REJECT A BID IF THE BIDDER FAILS TO SUBMIT THE
DISCLOSURE FORM WITH THIS INFORMATION BY THE STATED DEADLINE (see City Public
Contracting Rule 137-049-0360).
4. The Importance of Bids and Contract Documents
The submission of a bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the bidder that the bidder has
complied with each of the requirements listed above and that the contract documents are sufficient in
scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the
Work. The plans for the Project provide bidders a delineated description of the land owned and the area
involving easements. Bidders are to scrupulously follow these boundaries and not encroach upon, in any
manner, property owned by any other person.
The contract documents contain the provisions required for the construction of the Project. Information
obtained from an officer, agent, or employee of the City or any other person is not binding upon the City,
and shall not affect the risks or obligations assumed by the Contractor or relieve Contractor from fulfilling
any conditions of this solicitation or the contract, once executed, unless confirmed by written addendum
or contract amendment.
5. Requests for Clarification/Addenda
All questions about the meaning or intent of the contract documents shall be submitted to the City
representative in writing. If merited, replies may be issued by addendum, mailed or delivered to all
parties recorded by the City representative as having received the bidding documents, per City Public
Contracting Rule 137-049-0250. Requests for changes and clarifications shall be submitted in
accordance with City Public Contracting Rule 137-049-0260. Only questions answered by formal written
addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
6. Performance and Payment Bonds
A performance bond and a payment bond, in the forms attached, each in the amount of 100% of the
contract price, with a corporate surety approved by the City, will be required for the faithful performance of
the contract. Attorneys in fact who sign bid bonds or payment bonds and performance bonds must file
with each bond a certified and effective dated copy of their Power of Attorney. All bonding companies
must be authorized to do business in the State of Oregon.
7. City Investigation of Bidder
The City may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to
perform work. In determining the lowest responsible bidder, City shall check the list created by the
Construction Contractors Board under ORS 701.227 for bidders who are not qualified to hold a public
improvement contract and determine whether the bidder has met the standards of responsibility. City
shall also consider the following factors and may disqualify any person as a bidder if it finds the bidder:
(a) Does not have available the appropriate financial, material, equipment, facility and personnel
resources and expertise, or the ability to obtain the resources and expertise, necessary to meet
all contractual responsibilities;
(b) Does not have a satisfactory record of performance. The City shall document the record of
performance of a bidder if the City finds the bidder not to be responsible under this paragraph (b);
(c) Does not have a satisfactory record of integrity. The City shall document the record of integrity of
a bidder if the City finds the bidder not to be responsible under this paragraph (c);

(d) Is not qualified legally to contract with the City; or
(e) Has not supplied all necessary information in connection with the inquiry concerning
responsibility.
Each bidder shall promptly supply information as requested by the City pursuant to such investigation. If
a bidder fails to promptly supply information requested by the City concerning responsibility, the City shall
base the determination of responsibility upon any available information, or may find the bidder not to be
responsible. Failure to supply such information may be grounds for disqualification.
8. Registration and Licenses
No bid for a construction contract shall be received or considered by the City unless the bidder is
registered and in good standing with the Construction Contractors Board or licensed and in good standing
with the State Landscape Contractors Board, as required by ORS 671.530. Bidders need not be licensed
to work with asbestos, under ORS 468A.720.
9. Protests
Award and solicitation protests shall be submitted in accordance with City Public Contracting Rules 137-
049-0260(3) and 137-049-0450(4), respectively.
10. Process
City anticipates awarding the Contract within 14 days after the scheduled opening.
The bidder to whom the contract is awarded will be required to execute the agreement and obtain the
performance and payment bonds within ten (10) calendar days from the date when Notice of Award is
delivered to the bidder. The Notice of Award shall be accompanied by the necessary agreement and
bond forms. In case of a failure of the bidder to execute the agreement, the City may, at its option,
consider the bidder in default in which case the bid bond accompanying the bid shall become the property
of the City.
The City, within ten (10) days of receipt of an acceptable performance bond, an acceptable payment
bond, and the required agreements signed by the successful bidder, including proof of insurance as
required by the contract documents, shall sign and return to the successful bidder an executed duplicate
of the agreement and notice to proceed. If the 10-day notice to proceed has not been issued within the
10-day period, or within a period mutually agreed upon, the Contractor may terminate the agreement
without further liability on the party of either party. Such termination shall be by written notices and will be
effective upon receipt by the City.
The award will be made to the lowest responsible bidder. The Contractor shall submit to the City
representative by the last calendar day of each month a partial payment estimate for work performed
during the prior pay period. The cutoff date for work performed shall be the 26th day of the month in
which a payment estimate is submitted. The City will approve and authorize payment of partial payment
estimates approved by the City representative at its regular monthly City Council meeting.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION - 00 31 00
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
EXISTING REPORTS AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

2.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT
A. A copy of the geotechnical reports with respect to the building site is available for viewing:
1. Tile: Geotechnical Engineering Services Report, Proposed Municipal Pool Replacement and
Expansion, 25192 East Broadway Avenue, Veneta, Oregon 97487 dated May 5, 2009.
2. Dated: May 5, 2009.
3. Prepared by: Earth Engineers, Inc.
B. The report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the
design of foundations, prepared primarily for the use of Architect.
C. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless
specifically referenced in the Contract Documents.
D. The report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface
conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction
of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing
to Owner.
2.02 ORIGINAL BUILDING AND SITE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
A. A copy of the original construction documents is available for reviewing:
1. Title: Veneta Municipal Pool
2. Dated: August 10, 2009
3. Prepared By: Robertson Sherwood Architects pc
END OF AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION

BID FORM - 00 41 00
BID FORM
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Title: Veneta Multi-Use Pool

Project Location: 25192 East Broadway Avenue
Veneta, Oregon
Owner's Name: City of Veneta

Owner's Address: 88184 8th Street,
RECEIPT OF BIDS AND FIRST TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE STATEMENT
Location for Receipt of Bids and First Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Statements:
City of Veneta
88184 8th Street,
Bids Due: No later than 2:00 p.m. on Wednesday, June 14, 2017
(Bids open immediately after receipt of Bids)
First Tier Subcontractor

Disclosure Statement due: No later than 4:00 p.m. on Wednesday, June 14, 2017
BIDDER’S NAME:
Bidder’s Address:
Telephone: FAX:
Oregon CCB # CCB Expiration date:
REQUIREMENTS:
-Collusion
-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure (to be submitted separately)
ADDENDA:
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of and agrees to be bound by addenda numbered _________
through _________, inclusive.

BID FORM - 00 41 00
BASE BID
The undersigned is (check one of the following and insert information requested):
_____ a. A Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of _____________; or
_____ b. A Partnership registered under the laws of the State of _____________; or
_____ c. An individual doing business under an assumed name registered under the laws of the
State of ___________________________; or
_____ d. An individual doing business under his or her own name;
and hereby proposes to furnish all material and labor and perform all Work as hereinafter indicated for the
Veneta Municipal Pool in strict accordance with Drawings and Specifications prepared by
Robertson/Sherwood/Architects pc for a Base Bid of $___________________;
__________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
and the Undersigned agrees to be bound by the following documents:
Advertisement for Bids

Instructions to Bidders
Bid Security
Affidavit of Non-Collusion
Certificate of Bidder/Contractor of Employee Drug Testing Policy
First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure
Form of Agreement
Performance & Payment Bonds
General Conditions
Drawings
Specifications Listed in Project Manual Table of Contents
Prevailing Wage Rates
Addenda
ALTERNATE BIDS
In addition to the Base Bid indicated above, the Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and material
and perform all Work relating to the following alternates as designated in Section 01 23 00.
NO. DESCRIPTION ADD
Alternate No. 1: Expanded Deck and Fencing $____________
It is understood that the Base Bid may be adjusted for any Alternates in determining the amount of the
Contract. Any or all of the Alternates may be accepted or reinstated by the Owner at any time within sixty
(60) calendar days after date of the Contract Award by the Owner, and if accepted or reinstated, payment
shall be made therefore at the respective amounts named herein. If, prior to acceptance of any Alternate
Bid, other Work is undertaken which affects the Alternate Bid Work, the Alternate Bid Sum will be
adjusted accordingly.

BID FORM - 00 41 00
OVERHEAD AND PROFIT
The above Bid Prices includes all fees, taxes, profit, overhead, and similar items, except those fees
identified in the Project Manual to be paid by Owner. It is understood that the sum of the Bid items shall
constitute complete compensation for construction of the projects and all appurtenances complete and
ready for operation as shown on the plans and specifications.
TIME OF COMPLETION
Work will be completed within the time stipulated and specified in Summary of Work, Section 01 10 00.
BIDDER'S RESIDENCY
____ The Bidder is a resident of the State of Oregon.
____ The Bidder is a non-resident of the State of Oregon as defined below.
A non-resident of Oregon is not one who has paid unemployment taxes or income taxes in Oregon during
the 12 calendar months immediately preceding submission of this Bid, nor has a business address in
Oregon.
If the Bidder is non-resident, the Bidder shall indicate the state in which the Bidder resides and the
Preference Discount, if any, given by that state.
Bidder's State of Residence: ________________________________
Preference Discount given by Bidder's Residence State: __________________%
In determining the lowest responsible Bidder for this Work, the above stated percentage will be added to
the Bid of non-resident Bidders for purposes of determining the low Bidder, but the percentage will not be
added to the Contract Sum appearing in the Agreement.
OREGON TAX LAWS
The undersigned certifies that provisions of ORS 305.385, relating to Oregon tax laws will be complied
with.
WORKERS COMPENSATION
The undersigned certifies that the Bidder, its subcontractors, if any, and all employers which would work
on this project are subject employers under the Oregon Workers’ Compensation law and shall comply
with ORS 656.017, which requires them to provide Workers’ Compensation coverage for all their subject
workers.
BID SECURITY
Accompanying herewith is Bid Security; which is not less than ten percent (10%) of the total amount of
the Base Bid plus Additive Alternate Bids.
BID SECURITY FORFEITURE
The undersigned further agrees that the Bid Security accompanying this Bid is left in escrow with the
Owner; that the amount thereof is the measure of liquidated damages which the Owner will sustain by the
failure of the undersigned to execute and deliver the above-named Agreement, and Performance and
Payment Bonds, and that if the undersigned defaults in either executing the Agreement or providing the
Performance and Payment Bonds within ten (10) days after receiving the contract forms, then the full
value of the Bid Security may, at the Owner's option, become the property of the Owner; but if the Bid is
not accepted within sixty (60) calendar days after the time set for the opening of the Bids or if the

BID FORM - 00 41 00
undersigned executes and timely delivers the said Agreement and Performance and Payment Bonds, the
Security will be returned.
CONTRACT AND BOND
The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to provide proof that the Contractor and all
Subcontractors have Public Works bonds filed with the Construction Contractor Board or are exempt
under ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870, as amended by SB477. This shall be available to the City before
starting Work.
The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to deliver to the Owner within ten (10) days after
receiving the Contract forms an executed Agreement together with satisfactory Performance and
Payment Bonds in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum.
The Surety requested to issue the Performance and Payment Bonds will be:
Name of Surety Company: ________________________________________________________.
The undersigned hereby authorizes said Surety Company to disclose any information to the Owner
concerning the Undersigned's ability to supply Performance and Payment Bonds in the amount of the
Contract Sum.
EMPLOYEE DRUG TESTING PROGRAM
The undersigned certifies to have in-place a Qualifying Employee Drug Testing Program, pursuant to
ORS 279C.505(2).
FULL TIME ON-SITE SUPERINTENDENT
The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to: 1) provide a full time on-site project superintendent
as stated in the Full Time Superintendent Disclosure Statement, and; 2) to obtain the Owner’s written
permission prior to changing superintendents during the course of the project.
WAGE RATES
The undersigned agrees, if awarded a Contract, to be bound by and comply with the provisions of ORS
279C.800 to 279C.870 pertaining to the payment of prevailing rates of Wage.
CONTRACTORS' REGISTRATION
As a condition to submitting this Bid, a Contractor must be registered and in good standing with the
Oregon Construction Contractors Board in accordance with ORS 701.035 to 701.055, and the Contractor
must disclose the Registration Number. Failure to register and disclose the Number, will make this a non-
responsive Bid and the Bid will be rejected, unless contrary to Federal Law.
Contractor's Registration Number: _____________________________________
Expiration Date: _____________________________
SUBCONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
The undersigned hereby certifies that all Subcontractors performing construction work as described in
ORS 701.005(2) will be registered with the Construction Contractors Board prior to commencing work
under this Contract.

BID FORM - 00 41 00
NON-COLLUSION
The undersigned hereby certifies that the bid has been arrived at by the bidder, independently, and has
been submitted without collusion with, and without any agreement, understanding or planned course of
action with, any other contractor, bidder, or vendor on materials, supplies, equipment or services,
described in the invitation to bid, designed to limit independent bidding or competition. The contents of the
bid herein presented and made have not been communicated by the Bidder or its employees or agents to
any person not an employee or agent of the bidder or its surety on any bond furnished with the bid, and
will not be communicated to any such person prior to the official opening of the bid.
NON DISCRIMINATION
The undersigned certifies that Bidder has not discriminated and will not discriminate against minority,
women or emerging small business enterprises in obtaining any required subcontracts.
REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS TO BID FORM
Bid Security with Power of Attorney
SIGNATURES
Firm Name: ____________________________________________________________________
Address: _______________________________________________________________________
Phone: _____________________________ Fax: _____________________________
By: ___________________________________________________________________________
(Sole Individual)
Type or Print Name: _____________________________________________________________
or
By: ___________________________________________________________________________
(Partner)
or
By: ___________________________________________________________________________
(Authorized Officer of Corporation)
Attested By: ____________________________________________________________________

(Secretary of Corporation)
END OF BID FORM

BIDDERS BOND STATEMENT – 00 43 12
BIDDER’S PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT

BOND STATEMENT
(Contractor) is submitting a bid to City of Veneta (City)

pursuant to the City’s advertisement for bids the Veneta Multi-Use Pool project.
Contractor certifies that, if it is awarded the contract, Contractor has the financial ability to obtain good
and sufficient bonds in the forms attached, issued by a surety to the City, each in a sum equal to the
amount of the bid providing for the faithful performance of the contract.
Contractor understands and agrees that if Contractor fails to provide either the required performance
bond or payment bond, the City may reject the bid and the bid bond submitted with the bid may be
forfeited.
The surety requested to issue the performance bond will be (Surety

Company). Contractor authorizes Surety Company to disclose any information to City concerning
Contractor's ability to supply a performance bond in the amount of the contract.
The surety requested to issue the payment bond will be (Surety

Company). Contractor authorizes Surety Company to disclose any information to City concerning
Contractor's ability to supply a payment bond in the amount of the contract.
(Name of Contractor)
By:

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT – 00 45 19
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF ) City of Veneta

) ss.
County of ) Veneta Multi-Use Pool
I state that I am of and

that I am authorized to make this affidavit on behalf of my firm, and its owners, directors, and officers. I
am the person responsible in my firm for the price(s) and the amount of this bid.
I state that:
(1) The price(s) and amount of this bid have been arrived at independently and without consultation,
communication or agreement with any other contractor, bidder or potential bidder, except as
disclosed on the attached appendix.
(2) That neither the price(s) nor the amount of this bid, and neither the approximate price(s) nor
approximate amount of this bid, have been discussed with any other contractor, bidder or
potential bidder, except as disclosed on the attached appendix.
(3) No attempt has been made or will be made to induce any firm or person to refrain from bidding on
this contract, or to submit a bid higher than this bid, or to submit any intentionally high or
noncompetitive bid or other form of complementary bid.
(4) The bid of my firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement or discussion with, or
inducement from, any firm or person to submit a complementary or other noncompetitive bid.
(5) , its affiliates, subsidiaries, officers, directors and

employees are not currently under investigation by any governmental agency and have not in the
last four years been convicted of or found liable for any act prohibited by state or federal law in
any jurisdiction, involving conspiracy or collusion with respect to bidding on any public contract,
except as described on the attached appendix.
I state that understands and acknowledges that the above

representations are material and important, and will be relied on by the City in awarding the contract(s) for
which this bid is submitted. I understand and my firm understands that any misstatement in this affidavit
is and shall be treated as fraudulent concealment from the City of the true facts relating to the submission
of bids for this contract.
Name of Company:
Position:
SIGNED and SWORN to before me this day of , 2017,
by .
Notary Public for __________________

FIRST-TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE FORM – 00 45 22
FIRST-TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE FORM
PROJECT NAME: Veneta Multi-Use Pool
BID CLOSING: Date: Wednesday, June 14, 2017 Time: 2:00 PM
This form must be submitted at the location specified in the Invitation to Bid on the advertised bid closing
date and within two working hours after the advertised bid closing time.
List below the name of each subcontractor that is required to be disclosed, the category of work that the
subcontractor will be performing and the dollar value of the subcontract. Enter “NONE” if there are no
subcontractors that need to be disclosed. (ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NEEDED.)
NAME DOLLAR VALUE CATEGORY OF WORK
1) $
2) $
3) $
4) $
5) $
6) $
FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM BY THE DISCLOSURE DEADLINE WILL RESULT IN A NON-
RESPONSIVE BID. A NON-RESPONSIVE BID WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED FOR AWARD.
Form submitted by (bidder name):
Contact name:
Phone no.:

AGREEMENT FORM – 00 52 00
AGREEMENT FORM
THIS AGREEMENT is made this day of , 20__, by and between the
City of Veneta, hereinafter called Owner, and , hereinafter called

Contractor, in consideration of mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows:
1. Work. Contractor shall complete all work as specified in the contract documents and in
accordance with the documents and drawings provided for the Project known as the Veneta
Multi-Use Pool (Project).
2. Materials. Contractor will furnish all materials, supplies, tools, equipment, labor and other
services necessary for the construction and completion of the Project described herein.
3. Contract Time. The Work will commence within ten (10) calendar days after the date of notice to
proceed and will be completed by the Contractor within days unless the period for
completion is extended otherwise by the contract documents or by written agreement of the
parties.
4. Contract Price. Owner shall pay Contractor for performance of the Work in accordance with the
documents the sum of $ as shown in Contractor’s bid.
5. Liquidated Damages. None
6. Progress Payments. Owner shall make progress payments on the basis of the Contractor's
application for payment as approved by the Owner’s representative on or about the last day of
each month during construction as provided herein. All progress payments shall be on the basis
of progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values provided for in Section 19 of the
General Conditions. Prior to substantial completion, progress payments will be an amount equal
to not more than 95% of the Work completed and 95% of the materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work, but delivered and suitably stored, less in each case the aggregate of
payments previously made. Upon substantial completion, the Owner shall pay an amount
sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 95% of the contract price, less such
amounts as the Owner shall determine in accordance with Section 19 of the General Conditions.
Final payment shall be upon final completion and acceptance of the Work. Approved partial
payment estimates shall be reviewed and approved at the next regularly scheduled Council
meeting.
7. Contract Documents. The term “contract documents” means and includes the following:
(a) Invitation to Bid;

(b) Instructions to Bidders;
(c) Bid;
(d) Bid Bond;
(e) Construction Agreement;
(f) First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form
(g) Oregon Prevailing Wage Rates;
(h) General Conditions;
(i) Payment Bond;
(j) Performance Bond;
(k) Notice of Intent to Award;
(l) Notice to Proceed;
(m) Drawings and Specifications attached;
(n) Change Orders;
(o) Addenda; Number: Dated:
(p) Proof of Insurance

8. Contractor’s Representations. In order to induce Owner to enter into this agreement,

Contractor makes the following representations:
(a) Contractor has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the contract documents,
work, locality, and with all local conditions and any federal, state, and local laws,
ordinances, rules, and regulations which, in any manner, may affect cost, progress, or
performance of the Work;
(b) Contractor has studied carefully all reports, investigations, and tests of subsurface and
latent physical conditions at the site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of
work and which were relied upon in the preparation of the drawings and specifications;
(c) Contractor has made or has caused to be made examinations, investigations, tests and
studies of reports and related data, in addition to those referred to in paragraph (b), which
Contractor deems necessary for the performance of the Work, determination of the
contract price, and completion of the Project within the contract time in accordance with
the other terms and conditions of the contract documents. No additional examinations,
investigations, tests, reports, or similar data are or will be required by Contractor for such
purposes;
(d) Contractor has reconciled the results of all such observations, examinations,
investigations, tests, reports, and data with the terms and conditions of the contract
documents;
(e) Contractor has given the Owner's representative written notice of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies which he has discovered in the contract documents and the written
resolution thereof by the Owner’s representative is acceptable to the Contractor.
9. Miscellaneous.
(a) No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the contract
documents will be binding on another party to this contract without the written consent of
the parties sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation, monies which may
become due and monies which are due may not be assigned without such consent
(except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law) and unless
specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment
will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the contract
documents.
(b) This Agreement shall be binding upon all parties to the contract and their respective
partners, successor, heirs, assigns, and legal representatives
in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the contractual
documents.
THIS AGREEMENT is effective on the day of , 2017.
OWNER: CONTRACTOR:
By: By:
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

ATTEST: ATTEST:
Agent for Service of Process
License #

PAYMENT BOND FORM – 00 61 13.13
PAYMENT BOND FORM
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where
applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Address of

Principal Place of Business):
CONTRACT
Effective Date of Agreement:
Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Effective Date of Agreement):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each
cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
(Seal) (Seal)
Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By: By:
Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)
Print Name: Print Name:
Title: Title:
ATTEST: ATTEST:
Signature Signature
Title Title
1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns to Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment
furnished by Claimants for use in the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein
by reference.
Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 61 13.13

2. With respect to Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor:
2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and
2.2 Defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless Owner from all claims, demands, liens, or suits
alleging non-payment by Contractor by any person or entity who furnished labor,
materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract, provided Owner has
promptly notified Contractor and Surety (at the addresses described in paragraph 12) of
any claims, demands, liens, or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands,
liens, or suits to Contractor and Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default.
3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor promptly makes
payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due.
4. Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until:
4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with Contractor have given
notice to Surety (at the address described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice
thereof, to Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with
substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim.
4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with Contractor:

1. Have furnished written notice to Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to
Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished
materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy,
the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials or
equipment were furnished or supplied, or for whom the labor was done or
performed; and
2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from Contractor, or not
received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from
Contractor by which Contractor indicated the claim will be paid directly or
indirectly; and
3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to
Surety (at the address described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice
thereof, to Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and
enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to Contractor.
5. If a notice by a Claimant required by paragraph 4 is provided by Owner to Contractor or to Surety

that is sufficient compliance.
6. Reserved.
7. Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond
shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by Surety.
8. Amounts owed by Owner to Contractor under the Contract shall be used for the performance of
the Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any performance bond. By Contractor furnishing
and Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by Contractor in the
performance of the Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of Contractor and Surety under
this Bond, subject to Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the Work.
9. Surety shall not be liable to Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of Contractor that are
unrelated to the Contract. Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any
Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to,
give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to
related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of
competent jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located or after the
expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by
Paragraph 4.1 or Paragraph 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by
anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Contract,
whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by
law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the
suit shall be applicable.
12. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the addresses shown on
the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, Owner, or Contractor, however
accomplished shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the
signature page.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory requirement in the location where
the Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory
requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory
requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed
as a statutory Bond and not as a common law bond.
14. Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond,
Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
15. Definitions
15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor, or with a first-
tier subcontractor of Contractor, to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the
performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation
in the terms “labor, materials or equipment” that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil,
gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Contract, architectural and
engineering services required for performance of the Work of Contractor and Contractor’s
subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the
jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.
15.2 Contract: The agreement between Owner and Contractor identified on the signature
page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.
15.3 Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay
Contractor as required by the Contract, or to perform and complete or otherwise comply
with the other terms thereof.
FOR INFORMATION ONLY:

Name, Address and Telephone:
Surety Agency or Broker:
Owner’s Representative (Engineer or other):

PERFORMANCE BOND FORM – 00 61 13.16
PERFORMANCE BOND FORM
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that
________________________________________________________________
(Name of Contractor)
________________________________________________________________
(Address of Contractor)
a hereinafter called "PRINCIPAL", and

(Corporation, Partnership, or Individual)
________________________________________________________________
(Name of Surety)
________________________________________________________________
(Address of Surety)
________________________________________________________________
(Oregon representative for service of process for Surety)
hereinafter called "SURETY", are held and firmly bound unto
City of Veneta
8814 8th Street
P.O. Box 458
Veneta, OR 97487
hereinafter called "OWNER", in the total amount of

Insert here a sum
Dollars ($ ) for the equal to the contract price)

payment whereof PRINCIPAL and SURETY bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the PRINCIPAL has by written agreement entered into a certain contract with the OWNER,
dated the day of , 2017, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part
hereof and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. Said Contract is for:
NOW, THEREFORE:
1. The condition of this obligation is such that, if PRINCIPAL shall promptly and faithfully perform
said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and
effect.
2. The SURETY hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the OWNER.
3. It is expressly agreed that the Bond shall be deemed amended automatically and immediately,
without formal and separate amendments hereto, upon amendment of the Contract, so as to bind
Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 61 13.16 - 1

the PRINCIPAL and the SURETY to the full and faithful performance of the Contract as so
amended. The term “Amendment,” wherever used in this Bond, and whether referring to this
Bond, the Contract, or any Loan Documents shall include any alteration, addition, extension or
modification of any character whatsoever.
4. Whenever PRINCIPAL shall be, and declared by OWNER to be in default under the Contract, the
OWNER having performed OWNER's obligations thereunder, the SURETY may promptly remedy
the default, or shall promptly:
a) Arrange for the PRINCIPAL, with consent of the OWNER, to perform and complete the
contract;
b) Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or
c) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and
conditions, and upon determination by OWNER and the SURETY jointly of the lowest
responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and OWNER, and make
available as work progresses (even though there should be a default or a succession of
defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph)
sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the contract price; but
not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the SURETY may be liable
hereunder, the amount set forth above. The term “balance of the contract price,” as used
in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by OWNER to PRINCIPAL under
the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by OWNER to
PRINCIPAL.
5. Any suit under this Bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the date on
which final payment under the Contract falls due.
6. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with state law, such portion will be deemed deleted
therefrom and provisions conforming to such state law shall be deemed incorporated herein. The
intent is that the bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
7. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other
than the OWNER named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of the
OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of which

shall be deemed an original, this day of , 2017.
ATTEST:
PRINCIPAL
(PRINCIPAL) Secretary
(SEAL) By:
(Witness to PRINCIPAL) (Address)
(Address)

(SURETY)
ATTEST:
By
(Witness to SURETY) (Attorney-in-Fact)
(Address) (Address)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract.
If CONTRACTOR is partnership, all partners must execute Bond.
IMPORTANT: SURETY companies executing BONDS must appear on the Treasury Department's most
current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in Oregon. SURETY
companies must also have an Oregon representative for service of process.

GENERAL CONDITIONS – 00 72 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Section 1. Definitions. Whenever used in these General Conditions or in the other contract documents,
the following terms have the meanings indicated which are applicable in both the singular and plural or
masculine or feminine thereof:
1. Addenda. Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Agreement which
modify or interpret the contract documents, Drawings and specifications by additions, deletions,
clarifications, or corrections.
2. Bid. The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices
for the Work to be performed.
3. Bonds. Bid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
4. Change Order. A written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the contract price or the contract time issued
after the effective date of the Agreement.
5. Contract Price. The total monies payable to the Contractor under the terms and conditions of the
contract documents.
6. Contract Time. The number of calendar days stated in the contract documents for completion of
the Work.
7. Contractor. The person, firm, or corporation with whom the Owner has executed the Agreement.
8. Drawings. The part of the contract documents which show the characteristics and scope of the
Work to be performed and are referred to in the contract documents.
9. Owner’s Representative. That person appointed by the City Council of the Owner to act as the
Owner’s Representative in all matters relating to this contract.
10. Field Order. A written order issued by the Owner’s Representative which orders minor changes
in Work not involving an adjustment in the contract price or an extension of the contract time.
11. Substantial Completion. The date certified by the Owner’s Representative when the construction
of the Project or a specified part thereof is sufficiently completed in accordance with the contract
documents so that the Project or a specified part can be utilized for purposes for which it is
intended.
12. Subcontractor. An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or
with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site.
13. Supplier. Any person or organization who supplies materials or equipment for the Work, including
that fabricated to a special design but who does not perform labor at the site.
14. Work. All labor necessary to produce the construction required by the contract documents and all
materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project.
15. Written Notice. Any notice to any party to the Agreement, or relative to any part of this
Agreement, in writing is considered delivered and service completed when posted by certified
mail or registered mail to the party at the party’s last given address as shown on the Agreement,
or when delivered in person to the party or the party’s authorized representative on the worksite.

Section 2. Preliminary Matters.
1. Delivery of Bonds. When the Contractor delivers the executed Contract Documents to the
Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as the Contractor may be required to
furnish.
2. Copies of Documents. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to three (3) copies of the contract
documents. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
3. Commencement of Contract Time. The contract time will commence to run on the day indicated
in the Notice to Proceed.
4. Insurance. Before undertaking any Work on the Project, Contractor shall obtain and, during the
life of this Agreement, Contractor shall maintain the following minimum public liability and
property damage insurance naming the Owner as an additional insured, which shall protect the
Owner and the Contractor from claims for injuries, including accidental death, as well as from
claims for property damage which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the
Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents whether such
performance is by Contractor or any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
(a) Commercial general liability insurance, including personal injury liability, blanket
contractual liability and broad form property damage liability. The combined single limit
for bodily injury and property damage shall not be less than $2,000,000.
(b) Statutory workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for the State of
Oregon.
Contractor shall provide the Owner with certificates of insurance before undertaking any Work on
the Project. Insurance policies shall not be amended, canceled or terminated without 30-days
prior written notice to the Owner.
5. Owner Insurance. The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining its own liability
insurance. Owner shall also purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the site
to the full insurable value thereof and shall include the interest of the Owner, Contractor and
Subcontractors in the Work against the perils of fire and extended coverage. All other risk of loss
at the Work site shall be borne by Contractor until acceptance of building by Owner.
6. Subrogation Waiver. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other, their agents and
any Subcontractors and their agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other perils to
the extent covered by insurance provided for in this Section. The Contractor shall require similar
written waivers from each Subcontractor and each such waiver shall be in favor of all other
parties enumerated in this paragraph.
Section 3. Contract Documents.
1. The contract documents comprise the entire agreement between Owner and Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written modification, as provided in this
Agreement.
2. The contract documents are complementary; what is called for by one is binding as if called for by
all. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the
contract documents, Contractor shall report it to the Owner’s Representative in writing at once
and before proceeding with the Work affected by the conflict.
3. It is the intent of the specifications and Drawings to describe the complete Project to be
constructed in accordance with the contract documents. Any Work which may reasonably be

inferred from the specifications or Drawings as being required to produce the intended result shall
be supplied whether or not it is specifically called for. When words which have a well-known
technical or trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials, or equipment, such words shall
be interpreted in accordance with such meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals,
or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental
authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard,
specification, manual or code in effect at the time of the opening of the bid, except as may be
otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any reference, standard, specification,
manual or code shall change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Contractor, or any of
their agents or employees from those set forth in the contract documents. Clarifications and
interpretations of the contract documents shall be issued by the Owner’s Representative.
4. Re-use of Documents. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator,

Supplier, or distributor shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the
Drawings, specifications, or other documents which are a part of this contract. They may not be
reused by any party without the express written consent of the Owner and of the preparer of the
Drawings.
Section 4. Materials, Service and Facilities.
1. It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, water, lights, power,
transportation, supervision, temporary construction of any nature, and all other services and
facilities of any nature whatsoever necessary to execute, complete, and deliver the Work within
the specified time.
2. Materials and equipment shall be stored so as to ensure the preservation of their quality and
fitness for the Work. Stored materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be
located so as to facilitate prompt inspection. All materials and equipment shall be applied,
installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer.
3. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new except as otherwise provided in the
contract documents.
4. Equivalent Materials and Equipment. Whenever materials or equipment are specified or

described in Drawings or specifications by using the name of proprietary item or the name of a
particular manufacturer, fabricator, Supplier or distributor, the name of the item is intended to
establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the name is followed by words indicating
that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other manufacturers, fabricators,
Suppliers, or distributors may be accepted by the Owner’s Representative if sufficient information
is submitted by Contractor to allow the Owner’s Representative to determine that the material
proposed is equivalent to that named.
5. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all acts and omissions of its Subcontractors and of
persons and organizations directly or indirectly employed by Contractor and any Subcontractor
and of persons or organizations for whose acts any of them may be liable to the same extent
Contractor is responsible for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by Contractor.
Nothing in these documents creates any obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to
the payment of any monies due any Subcontractor or other person or organization except as may
otherwise be required by law.
Section 5. Fees, Taxes and Permits.
1. Contractor shall pay all applicable royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend all suits or
claims for infringement of any patent rights and save Owner harmless from loss on account
thereof.

2. All permits and licenses, including SDC or other governmental fees, licenses, and inspections
required for construction shall be obtained at the expense of Contractor. Owner shall assist the
Contractor when necessary in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all
governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work and which
are applicable at the time of Bid opening. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility service
companies for connections to the Work. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other
similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the laws of the place of the
Project.
Section 6. Survey, Permits and Regulations.
1. Owner shall furnish all boundary surveys and establish all base lines for locating principal
component parts of the Work together with a suitable number of bench marks adjacent to the
Work as shown in the contract documents. From the information provided by Owner, unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents, Contractor shall develop and make all detailed
surveys needed for construction such as slope stakes, stakes for piling locations, and other
working points, lines, elevations and cut sheets.
2. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points and stakes and, in case of
willful or careless destruction, Contractor shall be charged with the resulting expense and shall be
responsible for any mistakes which may be caused by unnecessary loss or disturbance.
Section 7. Protection of Work, Property and Persons.
Contractor will be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work. Contractor will take all necessary precautions for the safety of, or
provide the necessary protection to prevent injury, damage, or loss, to all employees on the worksite and
other persons who may be affected. Contractor shall also be responsible for all safety precautions
regarding all Work and all materials or equipment to be incorporated into the Work, whether in storage on
or off the site, and the property at the site or adjacent to it, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designed for removal, relocation, or replacement in the
course of construction. Contractor will remedy all damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly
or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or any for whose acts any of them may be liable except for acts directly
attributable to Owner or Owner’s Representative or any person employed by either of them whose acts
are not attributable directly or indirectly in whole or in part to the fault or negligence of Contractor.
Section 8. Supervision by Contractor.
The Contractor will supervise and direct the Work. Contractor will be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor will employ and maintain
on the Work a qualified supervisor who shall have been designated in writing by Contractor as
Contractor’s representative at the site. The supervisor shall have full authority to act on behalf of
Contractor and all communications given to the supervisor shall be as binding as if given to Contractor.
The supervisor shall be present on the site at all times as required to perform adequate supervision and
coordination of the Work.
Section 9. Changes in Work.
Owner, at any time the need arises, may order changes in the scope of the Work without invalidating the
Agreement. If such changes increase or decrease the amount due under the contract documents, or the
time required for performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment shall be authorized by Change Order.
Owner or its representative may also, at any time, by issuing a Field Order, make changes in the details
of the Work. Contractor shall proceed with the performance of any changes in the Work so ordered,
unless Contractor believes that such Field Order entitles Contractor to a change in Contract Price or

Contract Time, or both, in which event Contractor shall give Owner’s Representative Written Notice of the
proposed Change Order within two (2) days after receipt of the Field Order. Contractor shall document in
Contractor’s notice the basis for the change in Contract Price or Contract Time by separate notice
delivered within five (5) days of the date of the Written Notice of the proposed Change Order. Contractor
shall not execute such changes pending the receipt of an executed Change Order or further instruction
from Owner.
Section 10. Changes in Contract Price.
The Contract Price may be changed only by a written, signed Change Order. The value of any Work
covered by a Change Order or of any claim for increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be
determined by one or more of the following methods in the order of precedence listed below:
1. Unit prices previously approved.
2. An agreed lump sum.
3. The actual cost of labor, direct overhead, materials, supplies, and other services necessary to
complete the Work plus an amount not to exceed 10% of the actual Work to cover the cost of
general overhead profit.
Section 11. Liquidated Damages.
None.
Section 12. Correction of Work.
1. Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all Work rejected by Owner’s Representative
for failure to comply with the contract documents, whether incorporated in construction or not, and
Contractor shall promptly replace and re execute the Work in accordance with the contract
documents and without expense to Owner and shall bear the expense of making good all Work of
other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.
2. All removal and replacement Work shall be done at Contractor's expense. If Contractor does not
take action to remove rejected Work within five (5) days after receipt of Written Notice of
rejection, Owner may remove such Work and store the materials at the expense of Contractor.
Section 13. Subsurface Conditions.
Contractor shall promptly and before such conditions are disturbed, except in the event of an emergency,
notify Owner by Written Notice of:
1. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in the
contract documents.
2. Unknown physical conditions at the site of an unusual nature, differing markedly from those
ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work of the character provided for
in the contract.
Owner shall promptly investigate the conditions and if found that such conditions do so materially differ
and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of or in the time required for performance of the Work, an
equitable adjustment shall be made and the contract documents shall be modified by a change order.
Any claim of Contractor for adjustment hereunder shall not be allowed unless he has given the required
Written Notice.

Section 14. Suspension of Work, Termination Delay.
1. If Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt or insolvent or if Contractor makes a general assignment for

the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the Contractor or
for any of Contractor’s property, or if Contractor files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's
act or to reorganize under bankruptcy or applicable laws, or if Contractor repeatedly fails to
supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable material or equipment, or if Contractor repeatedly
fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors for labor, materials, or equipment, or if
Contractor disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public body having
jurisdiction of the Work, or if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner’s Representative or if
Contractor otherwise violates any provision of the contract documents, then Owner may, without
prejudice to any other right or remedy, after giving Contractor and Contractor’s surety a minimum
of five (5) days’ Written Notice, terminate the services of the Contractor and take possession of
the Project and all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and machinery owned by
Contractor and finish the Work by whatever method Owner may deem expedient. In such case,
Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the
unpaid balance of the contract price exceeds the direct and indirect costs of completing the
Project, including compensation for additional professional services, such excess shall be paid to
Contractor. If the costs exceed such unpaid balances, Contractor will pay the difference to
Owner. Such costs incurred by Owner will be determined by Owner and incorporated in a
change order.
2. Where Contractor’s services have been terminated under Section 14.1, by Owner, the termination
shall not affect any right of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter
accrue. Any retention or payment of monies by Owner due Contractor will not release Contractor
from compliance with the contract documents.
3. After five (5) days from delivery of Written Notice under Section 14.1 to Contractor, Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the Project
and terminate the contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for all Work executed and any
reasonable expense sustained plus reasonable profit for the Work performed.
Section 15. Equal Opportunity.
Contractor agrees to comply with the applicable provisions of the Equal Opportunity Act of 1972 and the
Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended. Contractor shall have the obligation to ensure that the employees
and applicants for employment are not discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, or
national origin.
Section 16. Public Contracting Code Requirements.
1. Contractor shall pay promptly, as due, all persons supplying labor or materials for the prosecution
of the Work provided for in the contract, and shall be responsible for such payment of all persons
supplying such labor or material to any Subcontractor.
(a) ORS 279C.580(3)(a) requires the prime Contractor to include a clause in each
subcontract requiring Contractor to pay the first-tier Subcontractor for satisfactory
performance under its subcontract within ten (10) days out of such amounts as are paid
to the prime Contractor by the public contracting agency; and
(b) ORS 279C.580(3)(b) requires the prime Contractor to include a clause in each
subcontract requiring Contractor to pay an interest penalty to the first-tier Subcontractor if
payment is not made within thirty (30) days after receipt of payment from the public
contracting agency.

(c) ORS 279C.580(4) requires the prime Contractor to include in every subcontract a
requirement that the payment and interest penalty clauses required by ORS
279C.580(3)(a) and (b) be included in every contract between a Subcontractor and a
lower-tier Subcontractor or Supplier.
2. Contractor shall promptly pay all contributions or amounts due the Industrial Accident Fund from
such Contractor or Subcontractor incurred in the performance of the contract, and shall be
responsible that all sums due the State Unemployment Compensation Fund from Contractor or
any Subcontractor in connection with the performance of the contract shall promptly be paid.
3. Contractor shall not permit any lien or claim to be filed or prosecuted against the Owner on
account of any labor or material furnished and agrees to assume responsibility for satisfaction of
any such lien so filed or prosecuted.
4. A notice of claim on Contractor’s payment bond shall be submitted only in accordance with ORS
279C.600 and 279C.605.
5. Contractor and any Subcontractor shall pay to the Department of Revenue all sums withheld from
employees pursuant to ORS 316.167.
6. Contractor shall demonstrate to Owner that an employee drug-testing program is in place within
ten (10) days of receiving a Notice of Award.
7. Pursuant to ORS 279C.515, if Contractor fails, neglects or refuses to make prompt payment of
any claim for labor or materials furnished to the Contractor or a Subcontractor by any person in
connection with the contract as such claim becomes due, the Owner may pay such claim to the
persons furnishing the labor or material and charge the amount of payment against funds due or
to become due to Contractor by reason of the contract. The payment of a claim in the manner
authorized hereby shall not relieve the Contractor or its surety from their obligations with respect
to any unpaid claim. If Owner is unable to determine the validity of any claim for labor or material
furnished, Owner may withhold from any current payment due Contractor an amount equal to
said claim until its validity is determined and the claim, if valid, is paid.
8. Pursuant to ORS 279C.515, if the Contractor or a first-tier Subcontractor fails, neglects, or

refuses to make payment to a person furnishing labor or materials in connection with the public
contract for a public improvement within 30 days after receipt of payment from Owner or
Contractor, the Contractor or first-tier Subcontractor shall owe the person the amount due plus
interest charges commencing at the end of the 10 day period that payment is due under ORS
279C.580(4) and ending upon final payment, unless payment is subject to a good faith dispute as
defined in ORS 279C.580. The rate of interest charged to Contractor or first-tier Subcontractor
on the amount due shall equal three times the discount rate on 90-day commercial paper in effect
at the Federal Reserve Bank in the Federal Reserve District that includes Oregon on the date that
is thirty (30) days after the date when payment was received from the public contracting agency
or from the Contractor, but the rate of interest shall not exceed thirty (30) percent. The amount of
interest may not be waived.
9. As provided in ORS 279C.515, if the Contractor or a Subcontractor fails, neglects, or refuses to

make payment to a person furnishing labor or materials in connection with the public contract, the
person may file a complaint with the Construction Contractors Board, unless payment is subject
to a good faith dispute as defined in ORS 279C.580.
10. Pursuant to ORS 279C.530, Contractor shall promptly, as due, make payment to any person, co-
partnership, association, or corporation, furnishing medical, surgical and hospital care or other
needed care and attention, incident to sickness or injury, to employees of such Contractor, of all
sums which the Contractor agrees to pay for such services and all monies and sums which the

Contractor collected or deducted from the wages of employees pursuant to any law, contract or
agreement for the purpose of providing or paying for such service.
11. Contractor shall employ no person for more than ten (10) hours in any one day, or forty (40)
hours in any one week, except in cases of necessity, emergency, or where public policy
absolutely requires it, and in such cases, except in cases of contracts for personal services
designated under ORS 279A.055, Contractor shall pay the employee at least time and one-half
pay for all overtime in excess of eight (8) hours a day or forty (40) hours in any one week when
the Work is five (5) consecutive days, Monday through Friday; or for all overtime in excess of ten
(10) hours a day or forty (40) hours in any one week when the Work week is 4 consecutive days,
Monday through Friday; and for all Work performed on Saturday and on any legal holidays as
specified in ORS 279C.540.
12. Pursuant to ORS 279C.540(2), the Contractor must give notice to employees who Work on this
contract in writing, either at the time of hire or before commencement of Work on the contract, or
by posting a notice in a location frequented by employees, of the number of hours per day and
the days per week that the employees may be required to Work.
13. The provisions of ORS 279C.800 to ORS 279C.870 relating to the prevailing wage rates will be
complied with.
(a) The hourly rate of wage to be paid by Contractor or any Subcontractor to workers in each
trade or occupation required for the public works employed in the performance of this
Contract shall not be less than the specified minimum rate of wage in accordance with
ORS 279C.838 and ORS 279C.840.
(b) The latest prevailing wage rates for public works contracts in Oregon are contained in the
following publications: The January 2017 Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works
Projects in Oregon, including any amendments issued prior to June 1, 2017. Such
publications can be reviewed electronically at:
http://www.oregon.gov/boli/WHD/PWR/Pages/pwr_oregon_2017.aspx
and are hereby incorporated as part of the contract documents.
(c) Contractor and all Subcontractors shall keep the prevailing wage rates for this Project
posted in a conspicuous and accessible place in or about the Project.
(d) The Owner shall pay a fee to the Commissioner of the Oregon Bureau of Labor and
Industries as provided in ORS 279C.825. The fee shall be paid to the Commissioner as
required by the administrative rules adopted by the Commissioner.
(e) If Contractor or any Subcontractor also provides for or contributes to a health and welfare
plan or a pension plan, or both, for its employees on the Project, it shall post notice
describing such plans in a conspicuous and accessible place in or about the Project. The
notice shall contain information on how and where to make claims and where to obtain
future information.
14. Unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9), before starting Work on this contract, or
any subcontract hereunder, Contractor and all Subcontractors must have on file with the
Construction Contractors Board a public works bond with a corporate surety authorized to do
business in the State of Oregon in the amount of $30,000. The bond must provide that the
Contractor or Subcontractor will pay claims ordered by the Bureau of Labor and Industries to
workers performing labor upon public works projects. The bond must be a continuing obligation,
and the surety’s liability for the aggregate of claims that may be payable from the bond may not
exceed the penal sum of the bond. The bond must remain in effect continuously until depleted by

claims paid under ORS 279C.836(2), unless the surety sooner cancels the bond. The surety may
cancel the bond by giving thirty (30) days’ Written Notice to the Contractor or Subcontractor, to
the Construction Contractors Board and to the Bureau of Labor and Industries. When the bond is
canceled, the surety is relieved of further liability for Work performed on contracts entered into
after the cancellation. The cancellation does not limit the surety’s liability for Work performed on
contracts entered into before the cancellation. Contractor further certifies that Contractor will
include in every subcontract a provision requiring a Subcontractor to file a public works bond with
the Construction Contractors Board before starting Work on the Project, unless exempt under
ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8), or (9).
(a) Unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8), or (9), before permitting a
Subcontractor to start Work on this public works project, the Contractor shall verify that
the Subcontractor has filed a public works bond as required under this section or has
elected not to file a public works bond under ORS 279C.836(7).
(b) Unless the Owner has been notified of any applicable exemptions under ORS
279C.836(4), (7), (8), or (9), the public works bond requirement above is in addition to
any other bond Contractor or Subcontractors may be required to obtain under this
contract.
15. As may be required by ORS 279C.845, Contractor or Contractor’s surety and every
Subcontractor or Subcontractor’s surety shall file certified payroll statements with the Owner in
writing.
(a) If Contractor is required to file certified statements under ORS 279C.845, the Owner shall
retain twenty-five (25) percent of any amount earned by the Contractor on the public
works project until the Contractor has filed with the Owner a certified statement as
required by ORS 279C.845. The Owner shall pay the Contractor the amount retained
within 14 days after the Contractor files the required certified statements, regardless of
whether a Subcontractor has failed to file certified statements required by statute. The
Owner is not required to verify the truth of the contents of certified statements filed by the
Contractor under this section and ORS 279C.845.
(b) The Contractor shall retain twenty-five (25) percent of any amount earned by a first-tier
Subcontractor on this public works contract until the Subcontractor has filed with the
Owner certified statements as required by ORS 279C.845. The Contractor shall verify
that the first-tier Subcontractor has filed the certified statements before the Contractor
may pay the Subcontractor any amount retained. The Contractor shall pay the first-tier
Subcontractor the amount retained within fourteen (14) days after the Subcontractor files
the certified statements as required by ORS 279C.845. Neither the Owner nor the
Contractor is required to verify the truth of the contents of certified statements filed by a
first-tier Subcontractor.
16. All employers, including Contractor, that employ subject workers who Work under this contract
shall comply with ORS 656.017 and provide the required Workers’ Compensation coverage,
unless such employers are exempt under ORS 656.126. Contractor shall ensure that each of its
Subcontractors complies with these requirements.
17. All sums due the State Unemployment Compensation Fund from the Contractor or any
Subcontractor in connection with the performance of the contract shall be promptly so paid.
18. The contract may be canceled at the election of Owner for any willful failure on the part of
Contractor to faithfully perform the contract according to its terms.
19. Contractor certifies that it has not and will not discriminate against minorities, women or emerging
small business enterprises in obtaining any required Subcontractors, or against a business

enterprise that is owned or controlled by, or that employs a disabled veteran as defined in ORS
408.225.
20. Contractor certifies its compliance with the Oregon tax laws, in accordance with ORS 305.385.
21. In the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall use, to the maximum extent economically
feasible, recycled paper, materials, and supplies, and shall compost or mulch yard waste material
at an approved site, if feasible and cost effective.
22. As may be applicable, Contractor certifies that all Subcontractors performing construction Work
under this contract will be registered with the Construction Contractors Board or licensed by the
state Landscaping Contractors Board in accordance with ORS 701.035 to ORS 701.055 before
the Subcontractors commence Work under this contract.
23. Pursuant to City Public Contracting Rule 137-049-0880, the Owner may, at reasonable times and
places, have access to and an opportunity to inspect, examine, copy, and audit the records
relating to the Contract.
24. Pursuant to ORS 279C.510, if feasible and cost-effective and contract is for demolition,
Contractor shall salvage or recycle construction and demolition debris.
25. Pursuant to ORS 279C.510, if feasible and cost-effective and contract is for lawn and landscape
maintenance, Contractor shall compost or mulch yard waste material at an approved site.
26. In compliance with the provisions of ORS 279C.525, the following is a list of federal, state and
local agencies, of which the Owner has knowledge, that have enacted ordinances or regulations
dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of natural resources
that may affect the performance of the contract:
FEDERAL AGENCIES:
 Agriculture, Department of
o Forest Service
o Soil Conservation Service
 Defense, Department of
o Army Corps of Engineers
 Environmental Protection Agency
 Interior, Department of
o Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife
o Bureau of Outdoor Recreation
o Bureau of Land Management
o Bureau of Indian Affairs
o Bureau of Reclamation
 Labor, Department of
o Occupational Safety and Health Administration
 Transportation, Department of
o Coast Guard
o Federal Highway Administration
STATE AGENCIES:
 Agriculture, Department of
 Environmental Quality, Department of
 Fish and Wildlife, Department of
 Forestry, Department of

 Geology and Mineral Industries, Department of

 Human Resources, Department of
 Land Conservation and Development Commission
 Soil and Water Conservation Commission
 State Engineer
 State Land Board
 Water Resources Board
LOCAL AGENCIES:
 City Council
 County Court
 County Commissioners, Board of
 Port Districts
 Metropolitan Service Districts
 County Service Districts
 Sanitary Districts
 Water Districts
 Fire Protection Districts
24. Once before the first payment and once before final payment is made of any sum due on account
of the contract for a public work, Contractor or Contractor's surety and every Subcontractor with a
Subcontractor's surety, shall file a statement with Owner in writing in the form prescribed by the
Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries, certifying the hourly rate of wage paid each
classification of worker which Contractor or Subcontractor has employed upon such public work,
and further certifying that no worker employed upon such public work has been paid less than the
prevailing rate of wage or less than the minimum hourly rate of wage specified in the contract,
which certificate and statement shall be verified by the oath of Contractor or Contractor's surety
or Subcontractor or the Subcontractor's surety, that Contractor or Subcontractor has read such
statement and certificate, knows the contents thereof, and that the same is true to Contractor's or
Subcontractor’s knowledge. A true copy of the certification or certifications required to be filed
pursuant to this section shall also be filed at the same time with the Commissioner of the Bureau
of Labor and Industries.
Section 17. Warranty and Guarantee.
1. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be done in accordance with the
Contract Documents and will not be defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to
Contractor. All defective Work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected or accepted.
Contractor understands that the City of Veneta and Lane County and their various departments,
and agencies, must be consulted and be allowed to inspect the Work and sign off in each
particular area. At all times Owner’s Representative and appropriate inspectors shall have
access to the Work for inspection and testing. Contractor shall provide proper and safe
conditions for such access.
2. Where any law, ordinance, rule, regulation, code, or other order of any public body having
jurisdiction requires any Work or part thereof to specifically inspected, tested or approved,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such inspection, testing, or approval, and pay all
costs in connection therewith and furnish Owner’s Representative with the required certificates of
inspection, testing or approval. If any Work to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered
without written concurrence of Owner’s Representative, it must be, if requested, uncovered for
observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor's expense.

3. Neither observations by the Owner’s Representative nor inspection tests or approvals by others
shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the
contract documents.
4. If, within two (2) years after the date of final completion and sign off and payment of any retainage
by Owner to Contractor, there is any defect in materials or workmanship, Contractor shall
promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions, either
correct such defective Work or, if it has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the site and
replace it with non-defective Work. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where a delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage,
Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced. All
direct or indirect costs of such removal or replacement, including compensation for additional
professional services, shall be paid by Contractor. Such additional professional services include
the services of any attorney employed by Owner to assist it in dealings with Contractor. If
Contractor does not pay for such Work, or does not ensure that such Work is performed as
required by this section, Owner may pursue reimbursement from Contractor, including pursuing a
claim upon Contractor's bond, if applicable, for payment of such Work. All notices sent to
Contractor shall have copies sent to Contractor's surety.
5. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by
the application for payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner at the
time of payment, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumbrances of any
party whomsoever.
Section 18. Bond Form.
Payment and Performance Bonds shall be in the form provided within the Invitation to Bid packet. Bid
Bonds shall be in the standard form of the issuing company. If a standard form is not available, the AIA
Form A-310 shall be acceptable for the Bid Bond.
Section 19. Payments to Contractor.
1. By the 5th day of each month, Contractor will submit to Owner’s Representative a partial payment
estimate filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work performed during the period
covered by the partial payment estimate and supported by such data as Owner’s Representative
may reasonably require. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at or near the site, the partial payment
estimate shall also be accompanied by such supporting data, satisfactory to Owner, as will
establish Owner’s title to the material and equipment, and protect its interest therein, including
applicable insurance. Owner’s Representative will, within ten (10) days after receipt of each
partial payment estimate, either indicate in writing his approval of payment and present the partial
payment estimate to Owner, or return the partial payment estimate to Contractor indicating in
writing his reasons for refusing to approve payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the
necessary corrections and resubmit the partial payment estimate. Owner will, within ten (10)
days of the next City Council meeting after presentation by Owner’s Representative of an
approved partial payment estimate, pay Contractor a progress payment on the basis of the
approved partial payment estimate. Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of the amount of each
payment until final completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the contract documents.
After fifty percent (50%) of the Work has been completed, Owner may, at Owner’s sole discretion,
reduce or eliminate retainage on the remaining progress estimates. When the Work is
substantially complete, Owner may, at Owner’s sole discretion, further reduce the retained
amount below 5% to only that amount necessary to assure completion. On completion and
acceptance of a part of the Work on which the price is stated separately in the contract
documents, Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, pay for that part of the Work in full, including
retained percentages, less authorized deductions.

2. A request for payment may also include an allowance for the cost of such major materials and
equipment which are suitably stored either at or near the site.
3. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner, with the approval of Owner’s Representative and with the
concurrence of the Contractor, may use any completed or substantially completed portions of the
Work. Such use shall not constitute an acceptance of such portions of the Work.
4. Owner shall have the right to enter the premises for the purpose of doing Work not covered by
the contract documents. This provision shall not be construed as relieving Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the care and protection of the Work, or the restoration of any damaged Work
except such as may be caused by agents or employees of Owner. Such entry or Work shall only
be allowed to the extent it does not interfere with Contractor's Work.
5. Upon completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner’s Representative shall issue a certificate
attached to the final payment request that the Work has been accepted by him under the
conditions of the contract documents. The entire balance found to be due the Contractor,
including the retained percentages, but except such sums as may be lawfully retained by Owner,
shall be paid to the Contractor within thirty (30) days of the issuance of the certificate of
completion and acceptance of the Work.
6. Contractor will indemnify and save Owner and Owner’s officials, employees, agents, and
volunteers harmless from all claims arising out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnishers or machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
tools, and all supplies, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of the Work. Contractor
shall, at Owner’s request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature
designated above have been paid, discharged or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, Owner may,
after having notified Contractor, either pay unpaid bills or withhold from Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged
whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of the contract
documents, but in no event shall the provisions of this Section be construed to impose any
obligations upon Owner to either Contractor, Contractor’s surety or any third party. In paying any
unpaid bills of Contractor, any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as a payment
made under the contract documents by Owner to Contractor and Owner shall not be liable to
Contractor for any such payments made in good faith.
7. If Owner fails to make payment thirty (30) days after approval of a partial payment estimate by
Owner’s Representative, in addition to the other remedies available to Contractor, there shall be
added to each such payment interest at the maximum legal rate commencing on the first day
after said payment is due and continuing until the payment is received by the Contractor.
Section 20. Cleanup.
1. From time to time as the Work progresses and immediately after completion of the Work,
Contractor shall clean up and remove all refuse and unused materials of any kind resulting from
the Work. Upon failure of Contractor to do so within 24 hours after being so directed by Owner’s
Representative, the Work may be done by Owner and the cost thereof may be deducted from any
payment due Contractor.
2. After all other Work embraced in the contract is completed and before final acceptance of the
contract, the entire right of way and driveways, alleys, and side street approaches, slopes,
ditches, utility trenches, and construction areas shall be neatly finished to the lines, grades and
cross sections shown in the specifications.

3. As a condition precedent to final acceptance of the Project, Contractor shall remove all equipment
and temporary structures, and all rubbish, waste and generally clean the right of way and
premises.
Section 21. Use of Light, Power and Water.
Contractor shall furnish temporary light, power, and water complete with connecting piping, wiring, lamps,
and similar equipment necessary before the Work is improved. Contractor shall install, maintain and
remove temporary lines upon completion of Work. Contractor shall obtain all permits and bear all costs
for connection with temporary services and facilities at no expense to Owner.
Section 22. Arbitration.
1. All claims, disputes, and other matters in question between Owner and Contractor arising out of,
or relating to, the contract documents, including rescission, reformation, enforcement, or the
breach of the terms thereof, except for claims which may have been waived by the making or
acceptance of final payment or for acquisition of property subject to eminent domain, may be
decided by arbitration. Owner shall have the sole discretion as to whether or not a dispute will be
decided by arbitration conducted in Lane County, Oregon, rather than through the court process.
2. No demand for arbitration of any claimed dispute or other matter shall be effective until after a
claim or demand regarding the underlying dispute is made to the City Council and the Council at
its next regularly scheduled meeting, has rendered a written decision with respect thereto denying
the claim or demand. No demand for arbitration of the denial of any such claim, dispute, or other
matter shall be made later than thirty (30) days after the date on which the City Council has
rendered a written decision denying the claim. The failure to demand arbitration within thirty (30)
days of the date of the City Council’s decision denying the claim shall result in the City Council’s
decision being binding upon Owner and Contractor.
3. Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the agreement.
The demand for arbitration shall be made within the 30 day period specified above. Owner, if not
the party demanding arbitration, has the option of allowing the matter to proceed with arbitration
or by Written Notice within five (5) days after receipt of a demand for arbitration, or rejecting
arbitration and requiring Contractor to proceed through the courts for relief. Arbitration shall be
conducted under the Uniform Arbitration Act, ORS 36.600 et seq. If the parties are unable to
mutually select an arbitrator within twenty (20) days following Owner’s decision to pursue
arbitration, then each party shall select an arbitrator, and the two arbitrators shall select a single
arbitrator. The arbitrator(s) shall have substantial experience in construction disputes. The
parties agree that any award rendered by the arbitrator will be final, and judgment may be
entered upon the award in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and will not be subject to
modification or appeal except to the extent permitted by Oregon law.
Section 23. Attorney Fees.
If suit, action or arbitration is brought either directly or indirectly to rescind or enforce the terms of this
agreement, the prevailing party shall recover and the losing party hereby agrees to pay reasonable
attorney's fees incurred in such proceeding, in both the trial and appellate courts, as well as any costs
and disbursements. Further, if it becomes necessary for Owner to incur the services of an attorney to
enforce any provision of this agreement without initiating litigation, Contractor agrees to pay Owner’s
attorney's fees so incurred. Such costs and fees shall bear interest at the maximum legal rate from the
date incurred, until the date paid by losing party.
END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS

SUMMARY - 01 10 00
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT
A. Project Name: Veneta Multi-Use Pool
B. Owner's Name: City of Veneta.
C. Architect's Name: Robertson/Sherwood/Architects pc.
D. The Project consists of the construction of a new multi-use pool and related site work.
1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
1.03 CONTRACT TIME
A. Commence Work: Not earlier than Monday, September 11, 2017, or as established in a Notice to
Proceed.
B. Substantial Completion: Within 100 consecutive calendar days of Notice to Proceed.
C. Final Completion: Within 30 days of the date of Substantial Completion.
1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.
B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.
C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.
B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:
1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION

ALTERNATES - 01 23 00
ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description of Alternates.
B. Procedures for pricing Alternates.
C. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders: Instructions for preparation of pricing for Alternates.
B. Document 00 52 00 - Agreement Form: Incorporating monetary value of accepted Alternates.
1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF Alternates
A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option.
Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF Alternates
A. Alternate No. 1 - Expanded Deck and Fencing:
1. Base Bid Item: No expansion of pool deck and related fencing.
2. Alternate Bid Item: Expand deck and perimeter fencing as indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS - 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preconstruction meeting.
B. Progress meetings.
C. Construction progress schedule.
D. Progress photographs.
E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
F. Number of copies of submittals.
G. Submittal procedures.
A. Document 00 72 00 - General Conditions.
B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Time.
C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
D. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Owner.
2. Architect.
3. Contractor.
C. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect.
6. Designation of personnel representing the Owner, Contractor and Contractor.
7. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
8. Scheduling.
9. Site access.
10. Application for payment procedures.
11. Procedures for testing.
12. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to
Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.

B. Attendance Required:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. Architect.
4. Contractor's Superintendent.
5. Major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Maintenance of progress schedule.
7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
11. Other business relating to Work.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to
Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule .
3.04 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to
submission of application for payment.
B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.
C. Provide photographs of construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced
photographer, acceptable to Architect.
D. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:
1. Completion of site clearing.
2. Excavations in progress.
3. Foundations in progress and upon completion.
4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.
5. Enclosure of building, upon completion.
6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.
E. Views:
1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Date of
Substantial Completion.
2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.
3. Provide factual presentation.
4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field,
and minimum distortion.
3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article
below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test reports.
4. Inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer's field reports.
7. Other types indicated.
B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken.
3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Other types as indicated.
D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.08 SAMPLES
A. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be
retained by Architect.
1. After review, produce duplicates.
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit in pdf format to Architect via email or approved drop box.
B. Shop Drawing Procedures:
1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the
Contract Documents and coordinating related Work.
2. Generic, non-project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the
requirements for shop drawings.
C. Sequentially number each submittal. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential
alphabetic suffix.
D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and
specification section number.
E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information
is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Submittals without
Contractor's prior review will be returned to Contractor without review by Architect.
F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.

G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - 01 32 16
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preliminary schedule.
B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Work sequence.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule .
B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule
for review.
D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
F. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus three copies that will be
retained by Architect.
G. Submit under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
1.04 SCHEDULE FORMAT
A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity
with the applicable specification section number.
B. Diagram Sheet Size: Maximum 22 x 17 inches or width required.
C. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
3.02 CONTENT
A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of
each element of construction.
B. Identify each item by specification section number.
C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work
completed, as of the first day of each month.
D. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and
dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of
finishes.
E. Indicate delivery dates for any owner-furnished products.
F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - 01 32 16
3.03 BAR CHARTS

A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.
B. Identify the first work day of each week.
3.04 UPDATING SCHEDULE
A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each
activity.
C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.
D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable
changes.
E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.
3.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE
A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to subcontractors,
suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in
schedules.
END OF SECTION

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS - 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. References and standards.
B. Submittals.
C. References and standards.
D. Mock-ups.
E. Control of installation.
F. Tolerances.
G. Testing and inspection agencies and services.
H. Control of installation.
I. Mock-ups.
J. Tolerances.
K. Manufacturers' field services.
L. Defect Assessment.
A. Document 00 31 00 - Available Project Information: Soil investigation data.
B. Document 00 72 00 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public
authorities.
C. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
D. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2014.
B. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2013.
C. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the
Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;
2012a.
D. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or
Testing; 2014a.
E. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of
assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents, or for Owner's information.
C. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.

1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention,
and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included
in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the
standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by applicable code.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until
E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect before proceeding.
F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those
of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in
any reference document.
1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified
testing and inspection required by code. Contractor shall employ and pay for any other required
testing and inspection.
B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance
with requirements of Contract Documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.02 MOCK-UPS AND FIELD SAMPLES

A. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective
product specification sections.
B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings,
seals, and finishes.
C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.
D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections
to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when
directed to do so by Architect.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do
not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION - OWNER RETAINED AGENCY
A. See individual specification sections and Structural Drawing Sheet S-001 for testing and
inspection required.
B. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance
of services.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or products.
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.
6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'
facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
testing/inspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required
by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by

the same agency on instructions by Architect.
F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when
necessary.
B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
END OF SECTION

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS - 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary telecommunications services.
C. Temporary sanitary facilities.
D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
E. Security requirements.
F. Vehicular access and parking.
G. Waste removal facilities and services.
H. Field offices.
1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation
required for construction purposes.
B. Existing facilities may be used as approved by Owner.
C. New permanent facilities may not be used.
D. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project
mobilization.
B. Telecommunications services shall include:
1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with necessary
software and laser printer.
2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.
3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.
1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.05 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas
that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect
existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and
demolition.
B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.06 FENCING
A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with
locks.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS - 01 50 00
1.07 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,
vandalism, or theft.
B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.
1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities,
and access for emergency vehicles.
B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is
not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
1.09 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly
condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly.
C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable
non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure
unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.10 FIELD OFFICES
A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped
with sturdy furniture, drawing rackand drawing display table.
B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
1.11 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial
Completion inspection.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
END OF SECTION

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS - 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. General product requirements.
B. Re-use of existing products.
C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
D. Product option requirements.
E. Substitution limitations and procedures.
F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.
G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
A. Document 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to
bid date.
B. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
C. Document 01 60 01 - Substitution Request Form.
D. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for
VOC-restricted product categories.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
functional equipment and appliances.
C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's
standard colors, textures, and patterns.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS
A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required
or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated,
reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner,
become the property of the Contractor; remove from site.
C. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or
other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.
D. Specific Products to be Reused: The reuse of certain materials and equipment already existing
on the project site is required.
1. See drawings for items required to be salvaged for reuse and relocation.

2.02 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:
1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 61 16.
2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 61 16.
3. Have a published GreenScreen Chemical Hazard Analysis.
2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. After the date of contract Substitution requests will be considered only for the following conditions:
1. Specified product is no longer available through no fault of the Contractor.
2. Specified product will not comply with code requirements.
3. Specified product will not work for the intended purpose or fit within the project requirements.
4. Contractor will not warrant the installation or functionality of the specified product.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents.
C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level
of the specified product.
2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for
the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become
apparent.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product
data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the
Contract Documents.
3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
A. See Section 01 10 00 - Summary for identification of Owner-supplied products.
B. Owner's Responsibilities:
1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to
Contractor.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.

3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.

4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items.
5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner.
3. Handle, store, install and finish products.
4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid
loss of factory calibration.
B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of
packaging.
C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
surrounding areas.
F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.
H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,
precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other
contaminants.
G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.
H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
or damage.

K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products
are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM - 01 60 01
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
TO: Robertson/Sherwood/Architect pc
132 East Broadway - Suite 540
PROJECT: Veneta Multi-Use Pool

Veneta Municipal Pool
25192 East Broadway
Veneta, Oregon
SPECIFIED ITEM:
Section Paragraph Description
The undersigned requests consideration of the following:
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
Attached data includes product descriptions, specifications, drawings, photographs, perform ance and test
data adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable data portions.
Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Docum ents and proposed substitution
requires for proper installation.
The undersigned certifies following item s, unless m odified by attachm ents, are correct:
1. Proposed substitution does not affect dim ensions shown on drawings.
2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and
construction costs caused by proposed substitution.
3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified
warranty requirem ents.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution.
Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent to
or superior to specified item .
Submitted by: ____________________________________ For use by Architect:

9 Approved 9 Approved as noted.
Signature: _______________________________________ 9 Not Approved 9 Received too late
Firm: ___________________________________________ By: ____________________________________________
Address:________________________________________ Date: __________________________________________

_________________________________________________
_______________________________________________
For use by City of Veneta:
Date: __________________________________________ 9 Approved 9 Approved as noted.
9 Not Approved 9 Received too late
Tel: ___________________ Fax: ____________________
By: ____________________________________________
Attachments:
_______________________________________________ Date: ___________________________________________
Veneta Multi-Use Pool 01 60 01-1

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS - 01 70 00
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Pre-installation meetings.
C. Cutting and patching.
D. Surveying for laying out the work.
E. Cleaning and protection.
F. Starting of systems and equipment.
G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures.
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, Electronic document
submittal service.
B. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.
C. Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be
commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections
D. Section 02 41 00 - Demolition: Demolition of whole structures and parts thereof; site utility
demolition.
A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey
work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations
of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For layout work, employ a land surveyor registered in Oregon.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping
equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from
soil erosion.
C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over
adjacent property.
1. Provide dust-proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors.
E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage
from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.
3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays.
4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly
apply corrective measures.
F. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects
from damaging the work.
G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water,
and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by
construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for
installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that
are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit,
as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to
maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and
work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
and extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site
prior to commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D. Protect control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during
construction.
E. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required
because of changes in grades or other reasons.
F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect.
G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

H. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility
locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
I. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
J. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal
lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate
surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements,
and sight exposed surfaces.
E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval.
F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
H. Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous
surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire
unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections
due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to
repairing finish.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or
remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to
eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site weekly and dispose
off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of
heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary,
obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible.
3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by
the equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system
installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
correctly.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.12 FINAL CLEANING

A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
E. Clean filters of operating equipment.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose
of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1. Provide copies to Architect.
B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for
completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of
C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been
inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect's review. Provide a list of all known deficiencies and work not yet complete.
E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing
Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected
and submit to Architect.
F. Architect will inspect the work to determine to determine Substantial Completion. If the work is
sufficiently complete the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion and attach a
list of incomplete and defective work to be completed.
G. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for
access to Owner-occupied areas.
H. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial
Completion final inspection.
I. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
J. In the event that the work is not complete to the degree certified by the Contractor any costs
associated with reinspection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The cost of reinspection
shall be deducted from funds due the Contractor at the following hourly rates:
1. Owner's Personnel: $75.00 / hour.
2. Architect's Personnel: $110.00 / hour.
3. Architect's Consultants: $110.00 / hour.
END OF SECTION

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS - 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Project Record Documents (Hardcopy and Electronic).
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties.
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product
data, and samples.
B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be
reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all
document sets as required prior to final submission.
4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.
C. Warranties:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,
submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the
warranty period.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Prior to application for Final Payment, update electronic AutoCad files provided by Architect for
such purposes. Updates to be made by a competent draftsperson.
F. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
G. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Update each item to record actual construction including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for
each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and
methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended
schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations
for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
E. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
F. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion
of data.
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.

4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.
D. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
E. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
F. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance
and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting,
balancing, and checking instructions.
G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
J. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required
for maintenance.
K. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
L. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.
M. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and
control diagrams.
N. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to
be maintained in storage.
O. Include test and balancing reports.
P. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with
data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.
B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for
each system.
C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
E. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consultants,Contractorand subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the
divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each
volume, with the current volume clearly identified.
I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on
the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major
component parts of equipment.
J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
L. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
Project Manual.
M. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description
identified, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers
of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods
and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of warranties.
N. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion
of data.
O. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and
systems, indexed to content of the volume.
3.06 WARRANTIES
A. Obtain warranties, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items
put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of
Substantial completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties until time specified for submittal.
E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers.
F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of
Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name
of responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual,
with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified,
and the name of product or work item.
H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.
Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier,
and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
END OF SECTION

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING - 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections.
B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:
1. All software-operated systems.
2. Plumbing equipment.
3. Electrical systems and equipment.
4. Pool systems.
5. Items specified in individual product Sections.
C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:
1. Fixtures and fittings.
2. Items specified in individual product Sections.
A. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level
of attendees.
1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.
3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.
4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.
5. Include at least the following for each training session:
a. Identification, date, time, and duration.
b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.
c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.
d. Intended audience, such as job description.
e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.
f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc.
g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.
h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided
by Contractor.
C. Training Reports:
1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration.
2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees.
3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to
supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could
not be answered in original training session.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the
relevant products and systems.
1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who
actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.
2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary
qualifications.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING - 01 79 00

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL
A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the
purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.
B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.
C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up,
shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance
procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
D. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and
repair procedures.
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL
A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.
B. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.
C. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule
training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to
conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for
personnel "show-up" time.
D. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:
1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies.
2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system
narratives, and product specific information.
3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.
E. Product- and System-Specific Training:
1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.
2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints,
and operational strategies.
3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal
changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative
maintenance.
4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.
5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety
issues and emergency procedures.
6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding
coverage.
9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.
10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.
11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.
F. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training
session, provide written response within three days.
END OF SECTION

DEMOLITION - 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Selective demolition of built site elements.
B. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures.
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.
B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers,
and waste removal.
A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCOPE
A. Remove existing concrete deck as required to accomplish new work.
B. Remove portion of underslab storm drain system as indicated on Drawings.
C. Remove portion of deck drain system as indicated on Drawings.
3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect existing improvements and other elements that are not to be removed.
B. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice,
flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
C. Partial Removal of Concrete Decks: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface.
D.
3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
B. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of
utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if
necessary.
3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES - 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010.
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.
D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in Oregon.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish
cast-in-place concrete work.
B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape,
lines, and dimensions.
C. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and
removal of formwork.
D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.
2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing
washer, 1 inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in
concrete surface.
B. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and
character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
C. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 12 00.

D. Waterstops: Polyvinyl chloride, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to
plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, 4 inch wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed
profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.02 EARTH FORMS
A. Earth forms are not permitted except at the bottom of footings, slabs on grade, and the sides of
the pit floor.
B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on
drawings.
F. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
G. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without
displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.
F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted
so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.05 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.

B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do
not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within
heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40
00 - Quality Requirements.
B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with
formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
3.08 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard
damaged forms.
END OF SECTION

CONCRETE REINFORCING - 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 13 11 50 - Swimming Pool Equipment.
D. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding connection to
concrete reinforcement.
A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.
B. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.
C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent
bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 318.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi).
1. Deformed billet-steel bars.
2. Unfinished.
B. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces.
C. Epoxy Adhesive:
1. HIT-RE 500 V3 by Hilti.
2. SET-XP Epoxy Adhesive by Simpson Strong-Tie.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.

CONCRETE REINFORCING - 03 20 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
C. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
1. Supported Slabs and Joists: 1 inch to top and 1-1/2 inch to bottom.
2. Walls (exposed to weather): 1-1/2 inch for No. 5 bars and smaller, 2 inch for No. 6 bars and
larger.
3. Walls (exposed to backfill): 2 inch.
4. Walls (exposed to pool side): 1-1/2 inch for #3 bars and smaller, 2 inch for No. 4 bars and
larger.
5. Pool Slabs on Grade: 1 inch for No. 3 bars, 1-1/2 inch for No. 4 bars and larger.
6. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch.
D. Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Section 26 05 26.
E. Support and secure against displacement by formwork construction or concrete placement.
Support with chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required.
F. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact and tightly wiring
and tying. Comply with requirements of ACI 318 for minimum lap of splice bars, except as
indicated otherwise.
G. Install rebar with epoxy adhesive as indicated on Drawings. Follow manufacturer's published
instructions for preparation, mixing, and placement of epoxy adhesive.
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect installed
reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
END OF SECTION

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pool deck slabs.
B. Pool construction.
C. Housekeeping pads.
D. Fence foundations.
E. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
F. Concrete curing.
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 07 07 16 10 - Cementious and Reactive Waterproofing: Treatment in gutters.
D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealants for joints and isolation joints in slabs.
E. Section 13 11 50 - Swimming Pool Equipment.
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).
C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007).
D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000.
E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.
F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010.
G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).
H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.
I. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.
J. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2015a.
K. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015.
L. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.
M. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.
N. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
O. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2014.
P. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
Q. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.

R. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use in Concrete; 2015.
S. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements and installation instructions.
C. Mix Design: Submit mix design listing materials, products, and quantities for each concrete
strength specified. Provide test results and standard deviation to meet mix design requirements.
D. Joint Layout Coordination Drawing: Submit drawing indicated proposed joint placement for
approval.
E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide water-tight pool and gutter construction.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide a five year extended correction period warranty for water-tightness of pool, gutter and pits.
Be responsible for removing and replacing materials and finishes as necessary to make repairs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00.
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, washed clean, free of deleterious substances;
maximum size of 3/4 inch at exposed aggregate flatwork and 1-1/2 inch elsewhere, and not larger
than 1/5 of narrowest space between forms, 1/3 of slab depth, nor 3/4 of minimum clear space
between reinforcing bars.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.03 ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of
cement.
B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

C. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Reducer:
1. Confilm by Master Builders, Inc.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; reinforced laminated kraft paper; for traffic and
non-traffic areas.
1. Orange Label Sisalkraft (Traffic Areas) and Sisalkraft SK-10 (Non-Traffic Areas) by Fortifiber
Corp.
C. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.
D. Snap-Tie Plugs: Preformed, non-shrink grout plugs to fill holes left by form ties; size to flush with
wall surface; matching adhesive.
2.05 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Bonding Agent: Neat Portland cement paste, mixed to a thick, brushable consistency.
B. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572.
1. Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Size: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Manufacturers:
C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top
section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal.
D. Joint Filler (Type A): Closed-cell polyethylene foam; 3/8 inch thick.
1. Sonoflex F by Sonneborn.
2. Hornfoam by A. C. Horn Inc.
E. Sealant and Primer: Type D - Elastomeric Deck Sealant as specified in Section 07 90 05.
2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace
slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations.
2. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect.
3. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect. Use of
admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of
field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended or required by manufacturer.
D. Type A - Concrete: Slabs decks, housekeeping pads, fence post foundations.
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000
psi.
2. Minimum Cement Content: 5 sacks per cubic yard.
3. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 20 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
4. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 42 percent by weight.
5. Total Air Content: 5 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M for work
exposed to exterior, pools, and pool equipment structures.

E. Type B - Concrete: Pools, sumps and pits.

1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,500
psi.
2. Minimum Cement Content: 6 sacks per cubic yard.
3. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 20 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
4. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 45 percent by weight.
5. Total Air Content: 5 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M for work
exposed to exterior, pools, and pool equipment structures.
2.07 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.
D. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert
epoxy adhesive and steel dowels.
3.03 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION
A. Install waterstop materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Coordinate with installation of formwork specified in Section 03 10 00 and reinforcement specified
in Section 03 20 00.
C. Ensure waterstop is not displaced during concrete placement.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices
will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
3.05 SLAB JOINTING
A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height
equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
D. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
F. Do not convey concrete through aluminum pipe.
G. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
H. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
I. Screed slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
3.06 FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:
1. Concrete Deck: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2. Under Ceramic Tile Finish: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/16 inch in 1 foot.
B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring
corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.07 COMPACTION
A. Employ mechanical high frequency vibrators to consolidate concrete around reinforcement, into
corners and angles of forms, and to exclude rock pockets, air bubbles, and honeycombs.
B. Hold vibrator in on position not longer than 30 seconds; keep in constant motion, insert and
withdraw at points approximately 18 inches on center.
3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. Install snap-tie
plugs at all snap-tie holes, exposed or concealed.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height.
C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin
floor coverings include thin set ceramic tile and plaster.
a. Provide finish or as recommended by tile manufacturer.
2. Surfaces in Gutter:
a. Provide finish or as recommended by plaster manufacturer.
3. Surfaces of Concrete Decks: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish
marks and other appearance defects.
a. Provide medium broom finish to match existing.
D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as
indicated on drawings.
3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other
surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive

manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and
adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring
manufacturer's satisfaction.
2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep
continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-fog spray, or
saturated burlap.
3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.
b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate
recommended by manufacturer.
00 - Quality Requirements.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit approved mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for their use
to commencement of concrete operations.
D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance
with specified requirements.
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete
placed.
F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
G. Perform one slump test for each delivery truck of concrete following procedures of ASTM C 143/C
143M.
H. Perform one air entrainment test for each set of test cylinders, requiring air entrainment, taken in
accordance with ASTM C 173.
I. Field verify bonding and grounding in pools, gutters, and pits.
3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Architect for each individual area.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Exposed Floors: Maximum variation of surface flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
B. Exposed Walls: Maximum variation of surface flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.13 SCHEDULE - JOINT FILLERS

A. Exterior Pool Deck Slab Joints: Joint filler Type A recessed 3/8 inch with Type C - Elastomeric
Deck Sealant specified in Section 07 90 05.
END OF SECTION

CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING - 07 16 10
CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Hydraulic grout.
B. Cementitious waterproofing.
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Substrate.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and
limitations.
C. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's installation instructions for application of products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Hydraulic Cement: Fast setting hydraulic cement, non-shrink; minimum 4,800 psi compressive
strength at 28 days; waterproof.
1. Sakrete Leakstopper by The Sakrete Companies: www.sakrete.com.
2. Duraplug by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.lmcc.com.
3. Waterplug by Thoro: www.thoroproducts.com.
B. Cementitious Waterproofing: High build, one component water-based acrylic waterproofing
coating; two coat application.
1. Thoroseal Waterproofing Paint by Thoro: www.thoroproducts.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify condition of substrate and adjacent materials under provisions of Section 01700.
3.02 INSTALLATION - HYDRAULIC CEMENT
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide waterproof seal.
3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide waterproof coating.
B. Apply in two coat application.
C. Apply to interior wall and floor of surge gutters.
END OF SECTION

JOINT SEALERS - 07 90 05
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Sealants and joint backing.
B. Preconstruction testing.
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Deck joint filler.
A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014.
B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.
C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
D. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods
resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in
Quality Assurance below.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, including the following:
1. Confirmation that joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated
below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Submit no fewer than four
pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings,
secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific
joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants
to joint substrate.
2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying Work.
3. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instruction for corrective
measures including use of specially formulated primers.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.

1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
1.08 WARRANTY
B. Provide a five year extended correction period for sealant work.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS
A. Type A - Pool Sealant (Horizontal): Elastomeric polysulfide, multi-component, chemical curing,
non-staining, non-bleeding, suitable for continuous water immersion in chlorinated pool water;
self-leveling; grey color.
1. Products:
a. Deck-O-Seal 125 by W. R. Meadows: www.wrmeadows.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Type B - Pool Sealant (Vertical): Elastomeric polysulfide, multi-component, chemical curing,
non-staining, non-bleeding, suitable for continuous water immersion in chlorinated pool water; gun
grade and non-sagging type; grey color.
1. Products:
a. Deck-O-Seal Gun Grade by W. R. Meadows: www.wrmeadows.com.
C. Type C - Elastomeric Deck Sealant: Single-component, non-staining, non-bleeding, suitable for
continuous water immersion, self-leveling and non-sagging types; grey color.
1. Approved Products:
a. Deck-O-Seal by W. R. Meadows: www.wrmeadows.com.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
C. Verify that preconstruction testing has been completed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces
and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.
2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.
3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.
E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H. Tool joints concave.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealants until cured.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Type A - Pool Sealant:
1. Horizontal control joints at pool, at junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of
dissimilar planes.
B. Type B - Pool Sealant:
1. Vertical control joints at pool, at junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of
dissimilar planes.
C. Type C - Deck Sealant:
1. Control joints at pool deck.
END OF SECTION

TILING - 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tile for pool wall and edge applications.
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Substrate.
A. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
B. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;
1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
C. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts
for Tile Installation; 2010 (Revised).
D. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set
Cement Mortar; 2012.
E. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2013.1.
F. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
G. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include
instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size
illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain
removal methods.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination.
A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five
years of documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

TILING - 09 30 00
B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified
for the location.
1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on the drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
1. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com.
2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.
3. Summitville Tiles, Inc: www.summitville.com.
B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Unglazed: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:
1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
2. Size and Shape: As scheduled on Drawings.
3. Edges: Square.
4. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
5. Colors: As selected from Price Group as scheduled on Drawings.
6. Trim Units: Matching cove and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.
2.02 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15.
2.03 GROUTS
A. Pool Grout: ANSI A118.7 high performance cementitious grout; suitable for intermittent wet and
submerged applications.
1. Color: As selected.
2. Products:
a. Hydroment Vivid by Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile in accordance with ANSI A108.5.
B. Install grout in accordance with ANSI A108.10.
C. Install movement joints in accordance with TCNA (HB EJ171 and ANSI C1193.
D. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
E. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints.
F. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout
joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
G. Form internal angles coved and external angles bullnosed.

TILING - 09 30 00
H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

I. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.
J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
K. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
L. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated.
M. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond
breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.
N. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION - POOL WALL AND EDGES - THIN SET METHOD
A. Over concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method P601TB-16, with dry set
Portland cement bond coat and pool grout.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION

EXPOSED AGGREGATE POOL FINISH - 09 97 23
EXPOSED AGGREGATE POOL FINISH

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preparation of substrate surfaces.
B. Exposed aggregate pool finish.
C. Pool start-up, including filling, adjusting chemistry, and brushing for specified initial start-up period.
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete" Substrate.
B. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Selection Samples: Color samples showing manufacturer's full selection.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. One copy of each of the following, for Owner's use:
1. National Spa and Pool Institute 'Pool Plaster Technology.'
2. National Plasterers Council 'Start-Up Do's and Don'ts for Newly Plastered Swimming Pools.'
3. National Plasterers Council 'Care Tips for New Swimming Pool Plaster.'
E. Submit batch numbers of bags used to Owner for warranty purposes.
A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of pool plasters or trained by coating
manufacturer.
1.05 WARRANTY
B. Provide manufacturer's 5-year limited warranty to pool owner.
1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide one bag of each batch used in mix to Owner, with description of mix ratio used and
installation instructions, for Owner's use in making repairs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Southern Grouts and Mortars: www.sgm.cc.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Pool Coating: SGM Diamond Brite exposed aggregate finish, made with 100 percent quartz
aggregate and polymer modified cement.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full line.
2. Provide enough material to have sufficient quantity for replacement of unsatisfactory work.
B. Bond Coat: SGM Bond Kote.
C. Hydraulic Cement (Pool Patch): SGM Instant Hydraulic Cement.

D. Patching Cement: SGM Vinyl Patching Compound or SGM Sand Topping Mix and Concrete
Bonding Agent.
E. Water: Potable water without detrimental minerals, metals, hardness, or alkalinity; if in doubt,
verify quality with coating manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrate to identify conditions that might interfere with proper bonding of coating.
1. Look for algae, mold, or mildew.
2. Look for dirt, paint, mortar droppings, patching compounds, loose tile, cracked plaster, etc.
3. Identify hollow spots in plaster by sounding.
B. Clean pool surfaces of all material that might interfere with proper bonding of coating.
1. Clean with high pressure water or by sand blasting.
2. Wash with chlorine until algae, mold, and mildew are gone.
3. Wash oil and grease spots using trisodium phosphate and water; soak if necessary.
C. Plug cracks and leaks around fittings using hydraulic cement (pool patch).
D. Etch cleaned surface with muriatic acid solution. Use concentration necessary to clean and
roughen surface; smooth surfaces may require higher concentration. Neutralize surface with
solution of baking soda and water.
E. Plug pool inlets and outlets to prevent clogging.
F. Mark location of fittings using tape on coping or on a measured drawing.
G. Provide sump pump at main drain to remove all running and standing water.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not begin installation until concrete pool shell has cured at least 28 days.
B. Apply coating in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Mix coating to produce best quality and consistent color throughout. If material from more than
one batch number is used, mix all batches together for color consistency.
D. Apply, trowel, and expose aggregate using methods and sequence selected to produce the most
uniform finish. Avoid practices that may cause washouts, shadows, streaks, or discoloration.
E. Apply an initial thin coat of finish to prepared surface; double back over with plaster application to
achieve minimum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thickness.
F. At areas that will be above water line, take care to avoid blisters or hollows and water cure for 7 to
28 days to reduce possibility of shrinkage cracking.
G. Replace areas of non-uniform appearance.
3.03 START-UP
A. Allow coating to air dry before filling pool; avoid filling too soon that could cause mottling; avoid
drying out causing shrinkage cracking.
B. Filter pool water using a carbon tank and sequestering agent to remove contaminants that might
cause staining.
C. Fill pool and start circulation system when water level is above return inlets; circulate water
continuously for the first 3 days.

D. Test water and adjust chemistry to best avoid discoloration and scale. Refer to coating
manufacturer's recommendations and National Spa and Pool Institute 'Pool Plaster Technology'
and National Plasterer's council 'Start-Up Do's and Don't for Newly Plastered Swimming Pools.'
E. Brush entire coated surface twice a day for the first 3 days. Thereafter, brush entire surface once
a day for 2 weeks.
F. Do not use wheeled vacuums for at least 14 days (to avoid wheel marks) and do not install
automatic vacuums for at least 28 days.
END OF SECTION

SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT - 13 11 50
SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT

PART GENERAL
A. Handrails.
B. Grab rails.
C. Recessed steps.
D. Compression anchors.
E. Gutter grate.
F. Spray area equipment.
G. Valve box.
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Cast-in-place items, support.
B. Section 09 9723 - Exposed Aggregate Pool Finish: Pool finish.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
B. ASTM 269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
C. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, joining details, fastening methods, terminations, and
installation details.
C. Product Data: Provide data on each item.
D. Templates: Submit installation templates to Contractor.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in products of this section with five years documented
experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Protect materials and products from damage.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 78 00.
B. Maintenance Data: Describe maintenance, lubrication, and cleaning procedures.
C. Operation Data: Pool blanket reels.
1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and/or as instructed by
manufacturer.

PART PRODUCTS
2.01 HAND RAILS
A. Material: Type 316L passivated seamless stainless steel tubing, mirror finish; 1.5 inch OD, 0.120
inch wall thickness.
B. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets; machined stainless steel.
C. Profiles and Configurations: Custom and indicated on Drawings; removable, deck mounted in
compression anchors.
D. Approved Products/Manufacturers:
1. Custom by Spectrum Aquatics: www.spectrumproducts.com.
2. Custom by SR Smith: www.srsmith.com.
2.02 GRAB RAILS
A. Material: Type 316L passivated seamless stainless steel tubing, mirror finish; 1.5 inch OD, 0.120
inch wall thickness.
B. Profiles and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings; removable, deck mounted in compression
anchors.
C. Approved Products:
1. Coho Grab Rails by Spectrum Aquatics: www.spectrumproducts.com.
2. Pretzel Bend by SR Smith: www.srsmith.com.
3. Pretzel Bend by KDI Paragon: www.paragonaquatics.com.
2.03 RECESSED STEPS
A. Material: Injection molded plastic, slip-resistant step surface.
B. Profile and Size: Rectangular shape, nominal 16 inch (400 mm) wide, 4 inch (100 mm) deep, 5
inches (125 mm) high; with perimeter flange, for flush wall mounting.
C. Approved Products:
1. Model 32102 Frost Proof by KDI Paragon Inc: www.paragonaquatics.com.
2.04 COMPRESSION ANCHORS FOR GRAB RAILS AND HANDRAILS
A. Anchors: Escutcheon-less, compression anchor, 304L stainless steel, for use with 1.5 OD rails.
B. Approved Products:
1. Compression Anchor #24092 by Spectrum Aquatics: www.spectrumproducts.com.
2.05 GUTTER GRATE
A. Material: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) I-bar grating; slip-resistant surfaces; white color; UV stabilized;
extruded PVC support angle; modular.
B. Grate Size: 14 inches wide x 1 inch deep, or as indicated on Drawings; 35 percent open for
drainage.
C. Support Angle: 1-1/2 inch wide x 1 inch high, with angled extrusion for embedding in concrete.
D. Approved Products:
1. PE-14-WT by Lawson Aquatics: www.lawsonaquatics.com.

2.06 SPRAY AREA EQUIPMENT

A. Schedule of Equipment:
1. Bubbler W091 (1 unit)
2. Geyserino W073 (1 unit)
3. Over N' Under W097-4 (2 units); 4 directional nozzles each; custom radial configuration
4. Under-Brella W007-F (1 unit); hand wheel activator.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Water Odyssey Aquatic Play Equipment by Fountain People, Inc: www.waterodyssey.com.
2.07 VALVE BOX
A. Water Play Equipment Valve Box: Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) valve box assembly consisting of
reinforced fiberglass sides, open bottom, polymer concrete ring at top, and polymer concrete, 10K
load rated, removable cover with slip resistant finish.
1. Size: Nominal 36 inches wide x 36 inches long x 24 inches deep.
2. Product:
a. Model A6001441AX36 by Armorcast Products Company: www.armorcastprod.com.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Verify that work is ready to receive work of this section and that dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings and/or instructed by the manufacturer.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Install components and systems in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Layout as indicated on Drawings.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Coordinate placing of work with Section 03 10 00, 03 20 00 and 03 30 00.
C. Install to flush with adjacent finishes where indicated.
D. Ground equipment to reinforcement.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01 70 00.
B. Clean and sanitize finishes.
C. Polish stainless steel items to mirror finish.
D. Touch-up finishes on prefinished items.
E. Clean systems and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION

GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS – 20 05 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Requirement of this Section apply to all work performed in Divisions 20, 22, 23, and 25.
B. The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by any one, as affects this
Division, shall be as binding as if repeated herein.
C. Separation of this Division from other Contract Documents shall not be construed as
segregation of the work.
D. Particular attention is called to Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Drawings and

Specifications, and modifications incorporated in the documents before execution of the
Agreement.
E. Location of equipment on Drawings is approximate. Plan exact location with respect to site
measurements and work of other trades prior to starting work. If measurements differ
slightly, modify work. If measurements differ substantially, notify Engineer prior to fabrica-
tion.
F. Make minor changes in equipment connections and equipment locations as directed or

required before rough-in without extra cost.
1.02 WORK INCLUDES
A. Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary equipment and labor to provide the
specified HVAC systems. The work includes but is not limited to:
1. Provide new pool systems including pumps, filters, piping, chemical treatment, and
associated materials and equipment to serve a new multiuse pool.
2. Provide connections to the existing heating water systems.
3. Extend bathhouse plumbing systems.
4. Provide temperature control for the existing and new swimming pools.
B. Omissions: Omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material necessary for
the proper execution of the work shall not relieve responsibility from providing such
additional labor or material.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall coordinate all work in Divisions 20 through 25 with work specified in other
Divisions to provide a complete installation. Expense of changes required because of lack
of supervision or coordination shall be borne by the Contractor. Such changes shall be to
the satisfaction of and directly supervised by the Engineer.
B. Check drawings of other trades to avert possible installation conflicts. Should major
changes from original drawings be necessary to resolve such conflicts, notify Engineer and
secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before installation is
started.
C. Architectural drawings govern all other drawings. Consult in detail the door swings, counter
heights and similar items affecting work before rough-in.
1.04 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Provide in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
Veneta Multi-Use Pool 20 05 00 - 1 SWE T017.02 (K018.01)

B. Manufacturers' product data and shop drawings shall be submitted as follows:

1. Prior to delivery of submittal documents, contractor shall review all manufacturers'
product data, shop drawings, and samples for compliance and conformance with
specifications, and shall incorporate changes, corrections and deviations known to
exist. Contractor shall affix his review stamp to documents and acknowledge such
review by his signature.
2. Submittals for manufacturers' product data and shop drawings shall be in sufficient
detail to establish conformance with specified requirements and as outlined under
Product Data, Shop Drawings and Samples described below. Specific features shall
be marked with color contrasting ink on printed literature. If translucent highlighting
method is used, highlighted print shall be reproducible by photocopy.
3. A complete submittal document shall be assembled in one or more three-ring, loose-
leaf binders. The complete document shall consist of all items identified in the
submittal schedule.
4. Order of the bound contents shall be same as in the submittal schedule.
5. Each item or logical group of items shall be identified by a separate tab marker in the
bound document (example: "pumps," "air compressors," etc.).
6. Each bound document shall contain a Table of Contents which lists each tab and
each item under each tab.
7. Catalog data and shop drawings (each separate item) shall be identified by the name
of the item, the system, the applicable specification paragraph number, drawings
number, and schedule.
8. Multiple submissions or submissions of manufacturers' product data or shop
drawings other than in one complete assembled document are not acceptable except
where prior written approval has been obtained. In such cases, a list of data to be
submitted later shall be included with the first submission.
C. Resubmittals shall be complete substitutions of original submittals.
D. Submittal information required must be provided regardless of whether the proposed item
or work is in exact accordance with specification requirements.
E. No item requiring approved submittal information shall be delivered to the site or installed
or any associated work performed until required submittals have been approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents by the Engineer. Any item delivered to the site
or installed, or any work performed without an approved submittal, which is deficient in
any way, shall be removed from the site at no expense to Owner.
F. Manufacturers’ Product Data:

1. Manufacturers' product data shall consist of one or more levels of manufacturer’s
information as described below and as requested in the submittal schedule. The
three levels of information include: manufacturer's list, manufacturer's catalog data,
and manufacturer's technical and engineering data. Mark submittal information
under each level to identify applicable products, models, options, and other
information as it relates to the specifications.
2. Manufacturer's List. Manufacturer's list shall include a typewritten list of
manufacturer's name, sizes and model or catalog numbers, referenced to the
specification section.
3. Manufacturer's Catalog Data. Manufacturer's catalog data shall include standard
catalog information marked to indicate specific equipment proposed and point of
operation, if appropriate. Include installation instructions.
4. Manufacturer's Technical and Engineering Data. Manufacturer's Technical and
Engineering Data shall include materials, dimensions, details, installation instructions,
weights capacities, illustrations, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, piping diagrams,
connection diagrams, performance data (including performance curves), mix designs,
and any other information required for a complete and thorough evaluation of the
equipment or items specified, and to verify compliance with the specifications. Such

data shall be clearly marked to indicate point of operation and performance as

required by the specifications. Control diagrams or control schematics, where
specified and required by the submittal schedule, shall include a detailed schematic
of the proposed control modifications and their interface with existing control
equipment, where appropriate, and a manufacturer and model number listing of all
proposed control components shown on the control schematic.
G. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings are construction drawings of an item being manufactured specifically
for this project. Shop drawings include dimensions, construction details, weights, and
additional information to identify the physical features of the piece of equipment.
2. Submit shop drawings in the form of blueline reproductions. After review by
engineer, contractor shall make appropriate changes on original, reproduce, and
distribute to the necessary parties including the engineer.
3. Minimum scale for shop drawings shall be 1/4" = 1'0" or larger if required for clarity.
H. Submittal Schedule
1. Submittals for manufacturers' product data, shop drawings, and samples are as
indicated below. Each item requiring a submittal is given the following code.
1- Manufacturer's list
2- Manufacturer's catalog data
3- Manufacturer's technical and engineering data
4- Shop drawings
5- Samples
6- Certificates
7- Test data
8- Worker's qualifications
9- Special requirements, see individual specification sections
Code
Division 20 – General Mechanical
20 05 00 General Mechanical Provisions ........................................................................................ -
20 05 13 Motors for Mechanical Equipment ............................................................................... 1,2
20 05 14 Motor Control Devices for Mechanical Equipment ...................................................... 1,2
20 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Mechanical Service .................................................................. 1
20 05 23 General Duty Valves for Mechanical Service ............................................................... 1,2
20 05 29 Pipe Hangers, Supports, Sleeves, and Seals ................................................................. -
20 05 48 Seismic Control for Mechanical Systems ................................................................. 1,2,9
20 05 53 Identification for Mechanical Systems ............................................................................. -
20 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for Mechanical Systems ........................................... -
Division 22 - Plumbing
22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation .......................................................................................................... -
22 11 02 Plumbing Piping ................................................................................................................ -
22 12 00 Plumbing Specialties .................................................................................................... 2,3
22 51 13 Swimming Pool Piping ..................................................................................................... -
22 51 16 Swimming Pool Pumps ................................................................................................ 2,3
22 51 19 Swimming Pool Water Treatment ................................................................................ 2,3
22 51 23 Swimming Pool Specialties .......................................................................................... 2,3
Division 23- HVAC

23 07 00 HVAC Insulation ............................................................................................................... -
23 21 13 Hydronic Piping ................................................................................................................ -
23 21 19 Hydronic System Specialties .......................................................................................... 2
23 57 19 Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers ................................................................................. 2,3

Division 25 – Integrated Automation

25 10 00 Building Automation Systems ......................................................................................... 9
A. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
B. Certify that each welder has passed the American Welding Society (AWS) qualification
tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.
1.07 CODES, STANDARDS
A. Applicable codes and standards shall determine minimum requirements for materials,
methods, and labor practices not otherwise stated herein.
B. Work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.08 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. Provide in accordance with SECTION 01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND

CONTROLS as required for completion of work. Provide additional filters as required to
keep areas clean during construction.
B. Maintain existing systems operational. Damage to existing equipment resulting from work
under this Contract repaired at no expense to Owner.
1.09 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Bind manuals in three-ring, high quality vinyl covered binders, clearly indexed and
provided with thumb tabs for each item or product. Include a directory of all
subcontractors and maintenance contractors with names, addresses, and telephone
numbers, indicating the area of responsibility for each. Index tabs shall match submittal
schedule and include any additional information required for operations and
maintenance, whether in submitted schedule or not.
B. Maintenance instructions shall indicate routine-type work with step-by-step instructions

that should be performed to ensure long life and proper operations. Recommended
frequency of performance shall also be included.
C. Provide copy of approved submittal for each product included in manual.
D. Provide printed copy and electronic configuration files for all packaged equipment control
systems furnished with equipment.
E. Mark the model actually provided where the literature covers more than one model.
Include four copies of all submittal data corrected to "as-built" conditions within the
manual.
F. Provide a composite summary table indicating each item of equipment listed in the
operations and maintenance manual and its required maintenance and time period. This
summary table shall be the first section in the O&M manual.
G. Operation and Maintenance Schedule

1. Manuals shall contain full information for each item of mechanical, electrical, or other
operating equipment, as given the following code.
1- Manufacturer's instructions for installation, startup, operation, inspection, and
maintenance.
2 - Lubrication schedules.

3 - Performance capacity.
4 - Catalog data sheets.
5 - Parts list.
6 - Maintenance schedules.
7 – Information required by section.
Code
Division 20 – General Mechanical
20 05 00 General Mechanical Provisions ........................................................................................ -
20 05 13 Motors for Mechanical Equipment ......................................................................... 1,4,5,6
20 05 14 Motor Control Devices for Mechanical Equipment ......................................................... 1
20 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Mechanical Service ................................................................... -
20 05 23 General Duty Valves for Mechanical Service ............................................................... 1,5
20 05 29 Pipe Hangers, Supports, Sleeves, and Seals ................................................................. -
20 05 48 Seismic Control for Mechanical Systems ........................................................................ -
20 05 53 Identification for Mechanical Systems ............................................................................. -
20 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for Mechanical Systems .......................................... 7
Division 22 - Plumbing
22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation ............................................................................................... -
22 11 02 Plumbing Piping ................................................................................................................ -
22 51 13 Swimming Pool Piping ..................................................................................................... -
22 51 16 Swimming Pool Pumps ....................................................................................1,2,3,4,5,6
22 51 19 Swimming Pool Water Treatment .......................................................................1,3,4,5,6
22 51 23 Swimming Pool Specialties .................................................................................1,3,4,5,6
Division 23- HVAC

23 07 00 HVAC Insulation ............................................................................................................... -
23 21 13 Hydronic Piping ................................................................................................................ -
23 21 19 Hydronic System Specialties .......................................................................................... 1
23 57 19 Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers .............................................................................. 1,3,5
Division 25 – Integrated Automation

25 10 00 Building Automation Systems .............................................................................1,4,5,6,7
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Provide record "as-built" drawings in accordance with Division 1 requirements. Show all
deviations from Contract Drawings and location of underground lines by accurate
dimensions from building lines. Show depth of all stub outs and underground lines.
Dimension all concealed piping from column grids or building lines. Transfer all information
to reproducible transparencies as required at the completion of the project.
1.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: After installation is complete, demonstrate to Engineer’s satisfaction as being

complete and operational and entirely in conformance with Contract Documents.
B. Preparation: Prior to demonstration:

1. Submit check-off list indicating completeness of submittals and certificates of
compliance for review to Engineer.
2. Operate completed system for one week.
3. Verify that control verification is complete and verification report has been approved by
Engineer.
C. Arrange for demonstration with Owner, Engineer, required factory technicians, and installer
at least one week in advance of demonstration.

1.12 TRAINING
A. Instruct Owner in proper operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.

Instruction shall generally include topics listed in manufacturer’s operations and
maintenance manual. Operator instructions shall cover all aspects of manual, automatic,
and safety controls. Contractor shall also instruct the Owner in the general configuration
of systems and location of equipment and components.
B. Furnish competent qualified technicians knowledgeable in the specific building systems

and equipment provided for this project for a minimum of 24-hours on-site to instruct
Owner in operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Contractor shall keep a
log of this instruction including date, times, subjects, and those present and shall present
such log when requested by Engineer. Contractor shall coordinate training with Owner’s
Project Manager and provide a schedule for training minimum two-weeks prior to
substantial completion. All training shall be complete 30-days after substantial
completion.
C. Contractor shall furnish training by equipment manufacturers in addition to training

described in this section where specifically listed in other sections. Contractor shall
schedule training with Owner’s Project Manager minimum 48-hours prior to training
session. Equipment shall be fully operational prior to scheduling training session.
Manufacturer’s field start-up, adjustment, and service will not fulfill manufacturer’s training
requirement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A. All materials employed in permanent construction shall be new, full weight, in first class
condition, and suitable for space provided. All similar materials shall be of one
manufacturer.
B. Scheduled equipment was used as the basis of design. If Contractor chooses to use
equipment that is not the basis of design, Contractor is responsible for all re-design and
construction costs associated with variations in arrangement, dimension, or capacity. Such
work may include, but is not limited to, changes to facility structure or dimensions and
revisions to associated mechanical and electrical systems needed to provide equal system
performance and maintainability.
2.02 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
A. Furnish and turn over to Owner, special tools not readily available commercially, that are
required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.
B. Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: Provide one for each type of grease
required for motor or other equipment.
C. Lubricants: Provide a minimum of one quart of oil, and one pound of grease, of equipment
manufacturer’s recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly
identified as to use for each different application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. Install equipment with sufficient access for service. Where not conveniently accessible by
other means, provide adequately sized access doors for valves, dampers, motors, belts,

and all other mechanical equipment requiring access for removal or maintenance. Type,
size and exact location of access doors shall be coordinated with Architect prior to work.
B. Provide clearances for maintenance access as indicated on drawings or as recommended

by manufacturer. If access requirements shown on drawings conflict with manufacturer’s
recommendations, provide larger clearance of the two.
C. If equipment location shown on drawings does not allow required access, notify Engineer
prior to start of work.
D. Apply and install all items in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Refer
conflicts between the manufacturer’s instructions and the contract drawings and
specifications to Engineer for resolution prior to starting work.
3.02 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING
A. Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment. Locate
piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment clear of windows, doors,
openings, lights, electrical outlets, and other services and utilities. Follow manufacturer's
published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified.
B. Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: Except where specifically

shown on drawings, select and arrange all equipment and systems to provide clear view
and easy access, without use of portable ladders, for maintenance and operation of all
devices including, but not limited to: all equipment items, valves, filters, strainers,
transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gauges and indicators shall be clearly visible by
personnel standing on the floor or on permanent platforms. Do not reduce or change
maintenance and operating space and access provisions that are shown on the
drawings.
C. Equipment and Piping Support: Coordinate structural systems necessary for pipe and
equipment support with pipe and equipment locations to permit proper installation.
D. Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with
equipment and piping locations.
E. Minor Piping: Small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling, and similar
minor services are generally not shown but must be provided. Contractor is responsible
to provide all such minor piping where needed to maintain mechanical spaces clean and
dry and to allow full equipment function and maintenance.
F. Interconnection of Controls and Instruments: Generally not shown but must be provided.
This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters, transducers, control devices,
control and instrumentation panels, instruments and computer workstations. Comply with
NFPA-70.
G. Switchgear Drip Protection: Do not install piping above electrical switchgear.
H. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Engineer determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not
conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed
and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the
Owner.
2. The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without
the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as
motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and
ductwork.

3.03 RIGGING
A. Close all openings in the building when not required for rigging operations to maintain
proper environment in the facility for Owner’s operation and maintenance.
B. Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on
foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on
structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility. Where it is not clear that the building
structure has adequate capacity to support rigging, Contractor shall check all clearances,
weight limitations and shall offer a rigging plan designed by a Registered Professional
Engineer. All modifications to existing building structure, including reinforcement thereof,
shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility.
C. Restore building to original condition upon completion of rigging work.
3.04 CLEANING SYSTEMS
A. General: After all equipment, pipes and duct systems are installed, system shall be
thoroughly cleaned. Remove all stickers and tags from equipment or fixtures. Clean all
piping systems prior to installation of insulation or painting.
B. Air Distribution Duct System:

1. Remove all debris from system before operation.
2. Repair or replace any discolorations or damage to system, building finish, or
furnishings resulting from Contractor’s failure to properly clean system.
3.05 START UP
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems and
shall coordinate startup procedures, calibration and system checkout. System operational
problems shall be diagnosed and corrected as required for system operation prior to
substantial completion inspection.
B. Start equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and under

manufacturer’s supervision where required. Ensure that associated filters, strainers,
electrical overloads, and other devices intended to protect the equipment are installed and
functional prior to startup.
C. Verify that piping has been flushed and cleaned prior to startup.
3.07 LUBRICATION
A. Lubricate all devices requiring lubrication prior to initial operation. Field check all devices
for proper lubrication.
B. Equip all devices with required lubrication fittings or devices.
C. All lubrication points shall be accessible without disassembling equipment, except to

remove access panels.
END OF SECTION

MOTORS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT – 20 05 13
MOTORS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide motors including bases, enclosure and mounts as specified herein and shown on
drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: G.E., Reliance, U.S. Motors.
2.02 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: Horizontal, squirrel cage induction, ball bearing motors.
B. General:
1. Stator core assembly and insulation: Stacked lamination. Non-hygroscopic for Class
"B." Class B temperature limits at 40 degrees C ambient. If anticipated ambient
temperature at motor location exceeds 40 degrees C, upgrade insulation class
accordingly.
2. Rotor and shaft assembly: Carbon steel shaft. Assembly dynamically balanced.
3. Bearing and lubrication: Ball bearings single row. Grease inlet and outlet fittings for
"in-service" re-greasing while equipment is rotating. Internal shaft flinger.
4. Conduit box and leads: Diagonal split with gasket. 90 degree steps. Stranded wire
leads, insulated, permanently identified.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 at 40 degrees C ambient temperature for 60 cycle NEMA design
B.
6. Nameplate: Embossed stainless steel fastened to frame with pins.
7. Finish: Factory applied primer and enamel.
8. Conduit box: Provided with knockouts.
9. Support: Adequate supports for installation and adjustment.
C. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled Enclosure:

1. Frame: Corrosion resistant cast iron.
2. End Brackets: Corrosion resistant cast-iron with machined bearing fits.
3. Ventilation: Exterior fan, mounted to motor shaft on non-load side of motor. Sized to
diameter of motor and heat sinks. Integral clutch to provide adequate fan rotation for
fan cooling. Ventilated safety cover over fan.
4. Heat Sinks: 0.5-inch height by 0.05-inch thickness by motor length spaced 2 inches
longitudinally at a minimum, and as required by NEMA. Additional surface area as
required if motor is installed where ambient temperature exceeds 40 degrees C.
D. Service: Nameplate rated as follows:

1. Continuous duty service.
2. Rated for use with variable speed drives where drives are required.
3. Nameplate voltage shall be less than or equal to scheduled voltage but not less than
95.8% of voltage rating of electrical system serving motor.
4. 1750 rpm or as scheduled.
E. Efficiency:
1. Test Method: IEEE Method B at full load.

MOTORS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT – 20 05 13
2. Motor Efficiency: Motor efficiency shall confirm to NEMA MG-1 Standards for Premium
Efficiency Motor.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
B. Coordinate connections with Division 23. Electrical connection by Division 26.
C. For motors used in inverter service, ensure distance from motor to inverter does not
exceed manufacturer recommended maximum.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Verify motor mounts are compatible with motor frame.
END OF SECTION

MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT – 20 05 14
MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Manual Motor Starters
B. Combination Motor Starters
1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide motor protection switches of the appropriate NEMA size. For units not using
NEMA rating, use equivalent NEMA size.
B. Provide motor protection switches in the proper enclosure as required by NEC for the
location installed unless more stringent requirements otherwise noted on the Drawings or
herein. Provide secondary enclosures where primary enclosures do not conform to NEC
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER, THREE PHASE
A. Provide molded case magnetic-only circuit breakers with rotary operating handle and lock-
off facility.
B. Restrict opening of switch enclosure by the use of a defeater screw unless switch is in the
OFF position.
C. Provide contactors with two overload relays.
D. 120 volt holding coil.
E. Provide pilot light in cover, green LED type.
F. Provide reset button, and Hand-Off-Automatic switch in cover, field convertible to Off/Auto
or Start/Stop momentary pushbutton.
G. Provide starters with three auxiliary contacts (N.O. and N.C.) to afford the control and
interlocking required in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each
contactor.
H. Provide control transformer with 120-volt secondary voltage of sufficient capacity to handle
operating coil and associated controls. Protect transformers with fuses on primary and
secondary sides of transformers as required by Code.
I. Minimum size NEMA 1.
J. Enclosure for dry, indoor locations: NEMA 1. Others as required by location.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT – 20 05 14
3.02 COMBINATION MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH INSTALLATION
A. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable cover plates.
B. Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided.
C. Set overload devices according to measured current of motors provided.
END OF SECTION

METERS AND GAUGES FOR MECHANICAL SERVICE – 20 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR MECHANICAL SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Bimetal Thermometers.
B. Pressure Gauges.
C. Compound Pressure Gauges
A. Store in manufacturer's original shipping packaging to prevent damage from water or other
deteriorating elements.
B. Handle to prevent shock and loss of calibration.
A. Environmental Requirements.
1. Temperature: Ambient 0oF to 120oF.
2. Moisture: Occasional water spray during cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BIMETAL THERMOMETER (Well-type)
A. Ashcroft, Marsh, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, Weiss.
B. Materials:
1. Dial: 5-inch diameter.
2. Case: 300 series stainless steel, hermetically sealed.
3. Stem: 300 stainless steel, 1/4-inch diameter. Stem length as required for application.
4. Window: Double strength glass or plastic.
5. Actuation: Bimetallic, silicone dampened.
6. Dialface: Aluminum, white background with black graduations.
7. Accuracy: +/- 1.0% Full Scale. ASME B40.3 Grade A
8. Scale: Select the proper scale range so that the operating temperature of the material
being measured will be approximately in the middle of the scale. 100oF range, or as
required to span entire normal operating range whichever is greater.
9. Socket: Provide socket material suitable for fluid measured.
2.02 PRESSURE GAUGES (Hydronic)
A. Ashcroft, Marsh, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, Weiss.
B. Materials:
1. Bezel Ring: Friction fit.
2. Lens: Plastic.
3. Pointer: Adjustable.

4. Scale: Black printing on white. 270-degree arc, 0 to 60 range, 1 psi increments. 0 to

100 psi range, 1 psi increments, or as required for system pressure encountered.
Range selected so that operating pressure approximately half of full range or maximum
scale value exceeds maximum pressure, whichever scale range is greater.
5. Elastic Chamber: Phosphor bronze or stainless steel alloy bourdon tube.
6. Multiplying Mechanism: Stainless steel rotary.
7. Case: 3-1/2-inch diameter, steel drawn, molded nylon, or die cast aluminum. Direct
pipe mounting.
8. Connectors: Brass, bottom location. ¼-inch male NPT.
9. Accuracy: ANSI, B40.1, Grade 2A.
C. Accessories:
1. Throttler: Pressure snubber, ¼-inch NPT. Brass body, bronze core for water service.
2. Cock: Tee handle gauge cock, brass, ¼-inch NPT.
2.03 COMPOUND PRESSURE GAUGES (Hydronic)
A. Ashcroft, Marsh, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, Weiss
B. Materials:
1. Bezel Ring: Friction.
2. Lens: Plastic.
3. Pointer: Adjustable.
4. Scale: Black printing on white. 270-degree arc, 0 to 30 inch Hg vacuum range, 1-inch
increments and 0 to 30 psi positive pressure range, 1 psi increments. 0 to 30 inch Hg
vacuum range, 5-inch increments and 0 to 100 psi positive pressure range, 5 psi
increments. Range selected so that operating pressure approximately half of full
range, or maximum scale value exceeds maximum pressure, whichever scale range is
greater.
5. Elastic Chamber: Phosphor bronze or stainless steel alloy bourdon tube.
6. Multiplying Mechanism: Stainless steel rotary.
7. Case: 3-1/2-inch diameter, steel drawn, molded nylon, or die cast aluminum. Direct
pipe mounting.
8. Connector: Brass, bottom location. ¼-inch male NPT.
9. Accuracy: ANSI, B40.1, Grade 2A.
C. Accessories:
1. Throttler: Pressure snubber, ¼-inch NPT. Brass body, bronze core for water service.
2. Cock: Tee handle gauge cock, brass, ¼-inch NPT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Check gauge calibration prior to installation.
3.02 TEMPERATURE GAUGES
A. Install where shown on drawings. Accessible for reading. Locations more than 6'-6" above
floor require angle of 30 degrees above horizontal for easy reading.
B. Sequence of Work: Ensure thermometer sockets are installed in proper locations before
hydronic system is filled with water and leak tested.
3.03 PRESSURE AND COMPOUND GAUGES
A. Install in piping where shown on drawings. Bourdon tube material suitable for fluid
measured.
B. Water Service: Gauge cock, throttle, and gauge installed in that order.
C. Range selected so that operating pressure approximately half of full range.
D. Ensure gauge sockets are installed in proper locations before hydronic systems are filled
with water and leak tested.
3.04 ADJUST
A. Calibrate meters and gauges and check operation as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR MECHANICAL SERVICE – 20 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR MECHANICAL SERVICE
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Butterfly valves.
B. Ball valves.
A. See Section 22 51 23 for Swimming Pool Valves
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Gruvlok, Kennedy, Hammond, DeZurik, Jenkins, Kennedy,

Metraflex, Milwaukee, or Victaulic.
B. Flanged lug type or grooved connections to match fittings specified for associated piping.
Rated 175 psig working pressure at 200 degrees F. MSS-SP 67
1. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B. Malleable iron, ASTM A47 electro-plated, or
ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 electro-plated.
2. Trim: Bronze, aluminum bronze, or 300 series stainless steel disc, bronze bearings,
316 stainless steel shaft, and EPDM resilient seat. Resilient seat shall be field
replaceable. Fully line the body to completely isolate the body from the product.
3. Actuators:
a. Valves 6 inches and smaller: Lever actuator with minimum of seven locking
positions, except where chain wheel is required.
b. Valves 8 inches and larger: Enclosed worm gear with handwheel, and where
required, chain-wheel operator.
C. Accessories: Provide chain operators on all valves 4-inch and larger located in mechanical
rooms more than 8-feet above finished floor.
2.02 BALL VALVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hammond, Milwaukee, or Nibco.
B. 2-inch and smaller: Brass body, chrome-plated or stainless steel ball, Teflon seals, full
port, 400 psig working pressure rating. Screwed or solder connections to match fittings
specified for associated piping. Provide stem extension to allow operation without
interfering with pipe insulation.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Locate valves as shown on drawings and at the following locations:

1. Where piping enters the building.
2. At branch connections to piping risers at each floor.
3. As required to individually isolate all equipment

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR MECHANICAL SERVICE – 20 05 23
4. To individually isolate building systems by section

5. As recommended by equipment manufacturers installation instructions.
6. To maintain proper flow and function of systems.
C. Install gate valves, globe valves, eccentric plug valves, and butterfly valves with stem in
vertical position wherever possible. Horizontal stem position is acceptable if vertical
position is not practical or where shown on drawings. Downward stem position not allowed.
D. Install swing check valves where flow is horizontal or upward. Check valve installation
where flow is downward not allowed.
E. Where drain valves are required, provide 3/4" ball valve with hose end connections.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Provide spring-loaded check valves for pumps 5 horsepower and larger and where shown
on drawings. Provide swing checks in other locations, expect as shown otherwise.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT
A. Check and adjust valves and accessories for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION

PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, SLEEVES, AND SEALS - 20 05 29
PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, SLEEVES, AND SEALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe Hangers and Wall Supports.
B. Floor Supports.
C. Insulation Shields.
D. Flashing, Sleeves, and Escutcheons.
E. Waterproof Wall Seals.
A. SECTION 20 05 48 – SEISMIC CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, load ratings, approved calculations and attachments required for
alternative seismic assemblies. Provide registered structural engineer’s stamp where
required by regulatory authority.
A. Seismic Restraint Requirements: Seismically restrain all piping per SMACNA Seismic
Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical System.
B. Alternative hanger, support, and bracing methods may be submitted. Approval will be
based on demonstration that alternative methods provide equivalent function and satisfy
the functional requirements for the referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND WALL SUPPORTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: ITT Grinnell, Gustin-Bacon, Michigan Hanger Co., Super Strut.
B. General: Furnish standard hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts,
nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories.
C. Materials: Wrought steel, stainless steel, or wrought steel with copper plating. Match
hangers and supports to piping material to prevent contact between dissimilar metals.
Rubber or vinyl coating in place of stainless steel or copper plating acceptable on low
temperature piping.
D. Adjustable Ring Hanger: For suspension of stationary piping. Comply with FS

WW-H-171E (Type 7). Similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 269.
E. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: For suspension of stationary piping. Comply with FS

WW-H-171E (Type 1). Similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 260.

F. Adjustable Steel Yoke Pipe Roll Hanger: For suspension of pipe where horizontal
movement may occur. Comply with FS WW-H-171E (Type 43). Similar to ITT Grinnell Fig.
186.
G. Universal Trapeze: For suspension of multiple pipe runs. Similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 46.
H. Riser Clamp: For support of pipe risers. Comply with FSWW-H-171E (Type 8). Similar to
ITT Grinnell, Fig. 261, Fig. 261c, or Fig.CT- 121.
I. Wall Supports: Welded steel bracket for piping support. Comply with FS WW-H-171E
(Type 32, 33, or 34). Similar to ITT Grinnell Fig.194, Fig. 195, or Fig. 199).
J. Hanger Rods: Machine threaded. Threaded both ends or continuously. Carbon steel
similar to Grinnell Fig. 140 or Fig. 146
K. Concrete Inserts: For support from new concrete slab, comply with FS WW-H-171E (Type
19). Similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 285. For existing concrete slab, use steel shell and
expander plug similar to Phillips "Red Head" concrete fastener.
2.02 FLOOR SUPPORTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Elcen, ITT Grinnell, Gustin-Bacon, Michigan Hanger Co.,

Super Strut.
B. General: Furnish standard floor supports complete with necessary steel or concrete pier
base, bolts, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
C. Adjustable Pipe Support Saddle: Stanchion type support with vertical adjustment for
stationary piping. Comply with FS WW-H-171E (Type 39) Similar to ITT Grinnell Fig. 264.
D. Adjustable Pipe Roll Stand: For support of pipe where longitudinal movement resulting
from piping expansion or contraction may take place and vertical adjustment is required.
Comply with FS WW-H-171E (Type 47).
2.03 INSULATION SHIELDS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pipe Shields, Inc., Insulshield, Uni-Grip.
B. Thermal Hanger Shields: Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof insulation,
encased with 360o steel jacket for pipe support. Same diameter as adjoining pipe
insulation. Insulation insert to extend 1-inch each side of steel jacket for chilled water,
potable cold water, and refrigerant piping.
C. Pipe Covering Protection Saddle: Curved carbon steel plate. Similar to ITT Grinnell, Fig.
160 through Fig. 165.
2.04 FLASHING, SLEEVES, AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Flashing: 26-gauge galvanized steel or 4 lb/square foot lead sheet.
B. Sleeves:
1. Outside wall floors on grade: Schedule 40 galvanized steel.
2. Swimming Pool Tanks: HDPE, molded-in waterstop. Similar to link seal Century-Line
Model CS sleeves.

C. Escutcheons: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel. One piece type with set screw
for fastening to pipe or sleeve. Not less than 3/32-inch thick for floor escutcheons. Not less
than .025-inch thick for piping 3-inch and under. Not less than .035-inch for piping 4-inch
and larger.
2.05 WATERPROOF WALL SEALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thunderline Link-Seal or approved.
B. Description: Modular mechanical type, interlocking synthetic rubber links, sized to fill
annulus between pipe and wall opening. Stainless steel bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Potable water and plastic piping:

1. Chilled Water and Condenser Water Piping:
Nominal Hanger
Pipe Size Type
1/2" - 1-1/2" Adjustable Ring
2" and above Adjustable Clevis
2. Heating Water Piping:

1/2" - 2" Adjustable Clevis
2-1/2" and above Adjustable Steel Yoke Pipe Roll
3. Drain Piping:
All sizes Adjustable Ring
B. Trapeze Hangers: Use for support of multiple piping runs. Size to carry maximum piping
load according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Riser Clamps: Support riser piping independent of horizontal piping. Provide riser clamp at
each floor. Preferably locate clamp immediately below coupling on steel or copper pipe or
hub on cast-iron pipe.
D. Wall Supports: Select support according to manufacturer's recommendations to carry

maximum piping load.
E. Spacing: Support horizontal piping as follows:

Hanger
Pipe Sizes Spacing Rod
Carbon Steel 1/2" 5'-0" 3/8"
Pipe 3/4, thru 1-1/4" 6'-0" 3/8"
1-1/2", thru 2" 10'-0" 1/2"
2-1/2", thru 3" 12'-0" 1/2"
3-1/2" thru 6" 12'-0" 5/8"
6" thru 18" 12'-0" 3/4"
Copper Tubing less than 1" 5'-0" 3/8"

and Piping 1-1/4" thru 2" 8'-0" 3/8"
2-1/2" thru 5" 10'-0" 1/2"

Plastic Piping 1/2" - 3/4" 2'-6" 3/8"

1" 3'-0" 3/8"
1-1/4" - 2" 4'-6" 3/8"
3" 5'-0" 1/2"
4" - 8" 6'-0" 5/8"
10" - 15" 8'-0" 3/4"
F. Locate hangers as close as possible to concentrated loads such as valves and loadings
imposed by branch connections.
G. Locate hangers as near as possible to horizontal changes in direction. If this is not

feasible, spans around corners should be reduced 25%.
H. First hanger off of the equipment not to exceed 50% of allowable piping span from
equipment connection.
I. For support from new concrete slab, provide concrete insert. Provide reinforcement rod in
concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inches. For support from existing concrete slab,
use expanding concrete fastener. Inspect existing structure to ensure structure will support
required load.
J. Priming: Prime coat all steel hangers and supports prior to installation.
3.02 FLOOR SUPPORTS
A. Install where shown on drawings and as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Provide steel or concrete pier support base.
C. Schedule:
1. For low temperature piping and high temperature piping below 4-inch use adjustable
pipe support saddle.
2. For high temperature piping 6-inch and larger, use Pipe Roll Stand.
D. Spacing: Support piping required for horizontal and vertical pipe hangers and supports.
3.03 INSULATION SHIELDS
A. General: Provide insulation shield on insulated piping at all hangers and supports.
B. Thermal Hanger Shield:

1. Provide for all roller type hangers and supports. Install according to manufacturer's
recommendation.
2. Butt joint between pipe insulation and shield. Seal with vapor barrier lap cement at joint
and 3-inch wide vapor barrier type tape.
C. Pipe Covering Protection Saddle:

1. Provide for all non-roller type hangers and supports.
2. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Sequence of Work:
1. Install when hanging pipe to allow hanger length and support height to be adjusted
properly for even piping load.

3.04 FLASHING, SLEEVES, AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Flashing:
1. Flash and counterflash with 26-gauge galvanized steel where piping passes through
roofing.
2. Flash vent and soil pipe with lead sheet. Extend flashing not less than 8-inches each
way from piping penetration. Counterflash vents with counterflashing turned into pipe
end or adapted to vent caps as required.
B. Sleeves:
1. General: Install at all concrete or masonry walls or floors.
2. Core drill hole in existing concrete or masonry for sleeve installation. Cast in place for
new work.
3. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions, or ceilings. Terminate sleeves 2-inches
above floor level at floor penetrations.
4. X Fasten sleeves securely to structure. Take precautions to prevent debris from
entering annulus between pipe and sleeve during construction.
5. For interior, non-waterproof wall penetrations, seal annulus with Dow-Corning 3-6548
silicone RTV foam or equal.
6. For exterior wall or floor penetrations, provide mechanical waterproof wall seal.
C. Escutcheons: Install escutcheons at all wall, floor, and surge tank pipe penetrations to
finished areas.
3.05 WATERPROOF WALL SEALS
A. Provide for each exterior wall or floor penetration.
B. Install and tighten seal as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SEISMIC CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS- 20 05 48
SEISMIC CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Design and installation of seismic restraint of new mechanical equipment, piping, and
ductwork installed hereunder.
1.02 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Custom Engineered Assembly: Anchorage and seismic restraint assembly comprised of

standard or proprietary components, designed and applied to system by the seismic
restraint system Engineer.
B. Pre-Engineered Assembly: Previously designed anchorage and seismic restraint

assembly selected and applied to system by the seismic restraint system Engineer.
C. Equipment:
1. Includes (but not limited to) boilers, economizers, flues, etc. Equipment referred to
by type is typical. Equipment not specifically listed here is still subject to the
requirements listed herein.
2. Weight: Installed operating weight of equipment as reported by equipment
manufacturer.
3. Floor-Mounted: Equipment located on and attached to floor.
1.03 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Restraint system, assemblies, and components shall be designed and installed to resist
lateral loads in accordance with the current adopted State of Oregon Structural Specialty
Code.
B. Seismic Design Criteria:

1. Building Occupancy Category: II for standard capacity.
2. Site Classification: E per Geotechnical Report.
3. Peak Spectral Response Acceleration: Ss = 0.827
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration: Sds = 0.611
5. Seismic Design Category: D
6. Occupancy Importance Factor: 1.0.
C. Seismic restraint design calculations shall consider localized effects on structural

elements induced by the connection loads.
1.04 SYSTEM ENGINEERING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Seismic restraint system shall be engineered to comply with criteria stated and
referenced herein.
B. System engineering shall be performed by a Structural Engineer currently licensed to

practice in the State of Oregon.
C. System engineering shall include design and application of Custom Engineered and/or
Pre-Engineered Assemblies, as applicable to this project.
D. Approved System Engineering Services: Mason Industries, Amber-Booth, Kinetics, or an

independent structural engineer.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports and seismic restraints.
Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard connections, and manufacturer's
certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces.
1. Seismic Restraint Location Plan: Full or half size copies of ductwork and piping
plans from the Contract Documents, showing locations and type of seismic restraint
assemblies to be used. Drawings shall consist of mechanically reproduced copies of
the Contract Documents, or custom drafted specifically for the Work of this Project.
Each drawing shall be printed on a single sheet. Drawings pieced together from
multiple copies are not acceptable.
2. Seismic Restraint Assembly Installation Details: Pre-Engineered or Custom
Engineered assembly details showing required components, dimensions, and
method of connection to supporting structure.
3. Calculations for System Application: Calculations shall indicate maximum forces
anticipated at each restraint assembly, method of determining forces, and
selection of restraint assemblies.
a. For Pre-Engineered Assemblies, include documentation of assumed design
conditions and maximum load capacity of assembly, certified by a Registered
Professional Engineer.
b. For Custom Engineered Assemblies, submit calculations identifying maximum
load capacity of assembly, maximum forces on each component,
sizing/selection of each component and maximum forces at anchorage points.
B. The entire submittal package comprised of drawings, details, and calculation shall be
stamped and signed by the seismic restraint system Engineer.
C. At completion of seismic restraint system installation, submit three (3) copies of report
from seismic restraint system Engineer, or the Engineer's representative, certifying that
seismic restraints are installed in conformance with approved shop drawings and no
additional restraints are necessary based on field conditions. Include written
authorization, from seismic restraint system Engineer or the designated representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRE-ENGINEERED ASSEMBLIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mason Industries, Amber-Booth, Kinetics, Tolco, B-Line,

or approved.
B. Anchorage and seismic restraint assembly comprised of standard or proprietary

components, capable of application to restraint system and supporting structure.
C. Assemblies may be selected from SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual or as

engineered by an approved proprietary manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the design of seismic restraint systems with contract documents indicating a
specific seismic design approach and load capabilities of the existing building structure.
B. Coordinate the design of seismic restraint systems with the equipment and piping support
structure provided hereunder.
C. Where information presented in the contract documents is not adequate to allow design
of seismic restraint, provide a request for information including a listing of specific
information required.
D. Notify the engineer when the existing building support structure or new equipment and
piping support structure is not adequate to provide seismic restraint.
E. Coordinate the seismic restraint design with new equipment to ensure manufacturer’s
recommended maintenance clearances are maintained.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic restraint system in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions and certified submittal data.
B. Maintain all existing walkways and service routes clear of seismic restraint cables and
other restraint equipment.
C. Attach restraints and anchors to a common structural element plane and within a
common structural system.
D. For non-isolated suspended equipment and piping, install solid braces or taut flexible
cable restraints.
E. Provide supplementary support steel for equipment, piping, and ductwork required
for the work of this Section.
F. Equipment Seismic Restraint

1. Coordinate size of new structural support pad and/or concrete piers to ensure
adequate space for required bases, isolators, restraints, and attachment
thereto.
G. Piping Seismic Restraint

1. Provide minimum of two transverse supports and one longitudinal support on each
pipe run. Transverse bracing shall be installed at each turn and at each end of a
run with a minimum of one brace at each end. Where a pipe is shorter than the
minimum interval between braces, provide braces at each end.
2. Where restraints are attached to clevis style pipe hangers, the cross bolt must be
reinforced.
END OF SECTION

IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT – 20 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Piping Identification
B. Valve Identification
C. Equipment Identification
A. ANSI A 13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Seton, Brady, MSI.
B. Label Description:
1. Semi-rigid plastic snap-around type with printed piping identification on colored
background.
2. Letter size: Conform to ANSI A 13.1
3. Background color: Conform to ANSI A 13.1
4. Direction arrow on each label indicating direction of flow
5. Legend Wording: Match piping description shown on Symbols list.
2.02 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Seton, Brady, MSI.
B. Valves identified by distinguishing numbers and letters as shown on valve chart.
C. Valve Tag:
1. Material: Polished brass or aluminum.
2. Identification: 1/4-inch high letters, 1/2-inch high numbers. Black filled.
3. 1-1/2-inch diameter.
4. Attachment: Smooth ply brass wire, brass "S" hook, or brass chain.
5. Legend Wording: Match piping abbreviation shown on Symbols list. Number valves
sequentially by system type. Coordinate with existing numbering sequence where
appropriate.
D. Valve Chart:
1. Valve identification number for each valve.
2. Location of each valve.
3. Purpose of each valve.
4. Normal position of each valve.
2.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates:
1. Aluminum: 2-1/2" x 3/4" high. Black enamel background. Etched or engraved natural
aluminum lettering.
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT – 20 05 53
2. Plastic: Laminated black-white-black phenolic plastic. Engraved to show white

lettering on black background, except for labels attached to ceiling grid or located within
finished spaces shall have black lettering on white background. Gothic letters
minimum 3/16-inches high.
B. Name of unit and number designation as scheduled on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of debris before attaching nameplates.
3.02 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide labels for piping. Labels shall be visible from walkways and service locations.
B. Locations of Pipe Labels as follows:

1. Adjacent to equipment connections.
2. Adjacent to each valve and fitting, except plumbing fixtures.
3. At each branch and riser take-off.
4. At each passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction.
5. At each passage to underground.
6. On all horizontal pipe runs every 25 feet.
7. Minimum one marker between pieces of equipment.
8. Coordinate location of piping labels in occupied spaces with Architect.
3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all valves specified in Division 23.
B. Valve Charts: One copy in each O&M manual.
C. Continue existing numbering sequence for new valves installed in existing buildings.
3.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide labels for all scheduled equipment. Place labels in a conspicuous place.
Nameplate either aluminum or plastic permanently attached to equipment. Provide
identical identification plate on starter and on disconnects.
3.05 TEMPORARY IDENTIFICATION
A. Temporarily identify piping during installation. Paint, chalk or other similar method allowed.
END OF SECTION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR MECHANICAL- 20 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of air and water systems specified in
Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC). Work shall generally
consist of volume adjustments, speed adjustments, performing tests, recording equipment
data and measurements, and preparing reports to achieve system performance as required
by Contract Documents.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
D. Project Supervisor: Individual employed by balancing contractor having administrative and

technical responsibility for work performed under this Section.
E. BAS: Building Automation System. Automatic control system consisting of standalone or

integrated digital controllers used to control HVAC equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor Qualifications: Submit documentation within 14 days of the Contract Date

demonstrating that TAB Contractor and Project Supervisor are AABC or NEBB certified.
B. Final Balancing Report: Provide six certified copies of final balancing report bearing seal of
Project Supervisor. Update draft balancing report responding to draft report review
comments.
A. Balancing Contractor and Project Supervisor shall be certified by AABC or NEBB.

Approved contractors: Air Balancing Specialties; Air Introduction and Regulation, Inc.;
Northwest Engineering Services, Inc., Southern Oregon Air Balancing.
B. All work under this Section shall be performed under the direction of the Project Supervisor.
1.05 SEQUENCING
A. Prebalancing meeting shall be conducted 30 days prior to start of balancing.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR MECHANICAL- 20 05 93
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Test Instruments: Furnished by Contractor.
B. Plugs: Provide plastic plugs in test holes drilled in ductwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Review Contract Documents for testing and balancing devices that are not included but
necessary to complete work such as balancing dampers, valves, flow measuring stations,
test plugs, access doors, etc. Submit list of recommended additional devices needed to
perform work.
B. Review Contract Documents for any conditions that are unclear, contradictory, or otherwise
may prevent specified systems from achieving design performance. Submit list of
conditions observed.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the latest addition of the AABC National
Standards or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems.
B. Accuracy of measurements and balancing tolerances shall be in accordance with AABC or

NEBB standards.
C. Special Balancing Procedures

1. Motors: Record starter overload settings. List overload part number and rating for
bimetallic overloads or setpoint for adjustable overload devices.
2. Pumps: Perform dead head test for all pumps ½ hp and larger.
3. Verify operation of automatic flow control valve on the new pool heat exchanger
heating water outlet.
4. Set the pool side exchanger bypass valve to provide scheduled pool water flow through
the exchanger. Mark set position.
D. Balancing is complete when following conditions are achieved:

1. Systems and components are tested and balanced within specified tolerances.
2. All efforts within the extent of TAB have been exhausted, and systems or components
are not operating within acceptable tolerances. Balancing is not complete until written
notification of all abnormal or deficient conditions is provided to the Engineer, written
direction is received, and all work required by Contract Documents is fully completed.
3.03 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing instruments shall be reliable, accurate, and in good working order. Calibration
maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with AABC and NEBB requirements.
END OF SECTION

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION – 22 07 00
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Piping insulation for plumbing systems.
A. Criteria:
1. Burning characteristics of insulation materials shall comply with NFPA 90A.
2. Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255.
3. Specified k factors are at 75oF mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional
insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than
that for the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow
tables. For run out insulation and condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment
need be made.
4. All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not contribute
to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state.
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing, or satisfactory certified test report from an
approved testing laboratory will be required to show that surface burning characteristics for
materials to be used do not exceed specified ratings.
B. Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered at the job site for use
must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description
of the material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING INSULATION
A. Glass Fiber Insulation (GF)

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Certainteed Corp., Manville, Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
2. Insulation: Fed. Spec. HH-I-558B, Form D, Type III, Class 12. Preformed sections with or
without all service jacket, maximum operating temperature 450oF, K=0.25 Btu in./hr., Ft2 oF
at 75oF, flame spread = 25 and smoke developed = 50.
3. All Service Jacket (ASJ): Fed. Spec. HH-B-100B, Type I, white kraft and aluminum foil
laminate, operating temperature range -20oF to 150oF, jacket permeance 0.02 perm,
puncture resistance = 50, flame spread = 25, and smoke developed = 50.
B. PVC Fitting Covers and Jacketing

1. Jacketing: 20 mil. PVC.
2. Fitting Covers: Molded PVC snap-on type valve and fitting covers with precut fiberglass
insulating blanket inserts. Provide stainless steel tack fasteners, vapor barrier mastic, and
pressure sensitive tape as necessary.

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION – 22 07 00
C. Insulation Schedule
Piping System Temp. Insulation Run- Thru 1.25" 2.5" to Over

Range Type outs 1" to 2" 4" 4"
Up to
2"
Plumbing Systems
Potable Cold Water (CW) 50-70 GF 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified.
A. General
1. Pressure tests of joints and connections shall be completed and work approved before
application of insulation.
2. Surfaces shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and
rust removed.
3. Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified piping systems including piping,
fittings, valves and accessories.
4. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in a
neat and professional manner. Insulation shall have smooth and even surfaces, jackets and
facings drawn tight, and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Finish all exposed ends and
other surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire partitions and
duct heaters.
6. Vapor barriers shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating
temperature 60oF and below.
7. Insulate piping individually.
8. Piping inside building, within five feet of the floor, and exposed to physical damage, shall
have metal jacket.
B. Glass Fiber Insulation

1. Butt all joints firmly together. Seal all longitudinal joint laps and circumferential butt strips.
Seal all vapor barrier penetrations on cold piping with application of vapor barrier mastic.
2. Fittings: PVC fitting covers with pre-cut fiberglass inserts. Completely fill fitting cover with
fiberglass inserts to level of adjacent insulation. Tape fitting joints. Seal seam edges with
vapor barrier mastic on cold piping.
3. , hot water, and cold water piping of all lavatories with prefabricated insulation jackets.
END OF SECTION

PLUMBING PIPING – 22 11 02
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Plumbing Piping Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POTABLE WATER PIPING (CW)
A. Seamless copper water tube ASTM B 88 hard drawn:

1. Above-grade Piping: Type M.
2. Below-grade Piping: Type L.
B. Fittings:
1. ANSI B16.22: Wrought copper and bronze solder joint pressure fittings.
2. ANSI B16.18: Cast bronze solder joint pressure fittings.
3. Joining: Solder up to 1-1/4 inches, Braze 1/1/2 inches and larger.
C. Solder Materials:
1. Solder Filler Alloy: ASTM B32, 95-5 Tin antimony (Sb5).
2. Flux: Fed. Spec. FS-0-F-506C, non-corrosive flux.
D. Brazing Materials:
1. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP-5.
2. Brazing Filler Alloys: ASTM B260-52T, Sil-Fos (15% silver, 80% copper).
3. Flux: Silver brazing flux, non-corrosive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Piping Layout
1. Give special attention to appearance of complete installation.
2. Make provision for expansion and contraction during normal operation.
3. Run parallel to wall of building.
4. Keep free of contact with building construction or installed items.
5. Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, not from drawings.
B. Copper Tubing:
1. Brazed and Solder Joints:
a. Ream or file pipe to remove burrs.
b. Clean and polish contact surfaces of joint.
c. Apply flux to both male and female ends.
d. Insert end of tube into fittings full depth of socket.
e. Bring joint to temperature in as short of time as possible.
f. Form continuous bead around entire circumference of joint.
3.02 DRAINAGE
A. Where possible, arrange piping so that systems can be completely drained.
END OF SECTION

SWIMMING POOL PIPING – 22 51 13
SWIMMING POOL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Piping serving swimming pools and related mechanical equipment including but not limited
to filters, pumps, chemical treatment, and heating systems.
A. System Operating Pressure: 100 psig maximum system operating pressure.
B. Seismic Restraint: See Section 20 05 48 – SEISMIC CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL

SYSTEMS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PVC PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS – SCHEDULE 40 AND 80
A. Pipe: ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. Material in
compliance with ASTM D1784, Class 12454.
B. Fittings: ASTM D2466 Schedule 40, ASTM D2467 Schedule 80 -.
C. Solvent Weld Cement: ASTM 2564.
2.02 CPVC PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS - SCHEDULE 80
A. Pipe: ASTM F 441 Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 80. Material
in compliance with ASTM D 1784, Class 24448.
B. Fittings: ASTM F 439 Schedule 80.
C. Solvent Weld Cement: ASTM F493.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. General Pool Water Piping:

1. 2 inches and Smaller: Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings.
2. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings.
B. High Temperature Pool Water Piping (From pool water inlet and outlet connections of pool
heat exchanger to the main pool circulation piping): Schedule 80 CPVC pipe and fittings.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive piping for the following.

1. Pipe bedding materials have been properly placed and all piping is fully supported prior
to backfill.
2. Defects that adversely affect execution and quality of work.

SWIMMING POOL PIPING – 22 51 13
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Piping Layout:
1. Complete installation to present a neat, orderly appearance.
2. Do not block openings or passageways with piping.
3. Run above grade piping parallel to walls of building, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Keep piping free from contact with structure or installed items.
5. Slope all piping to allow complete drainage in accordance with Oregon Administrative
Rule OAR 333-60.
B. Workmanship:
1. Examine pipe and fittings before installation and assure no defective materials are
incorporated.
2. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
C. Unless otherwise specified, PVC piping exposed to sunlight shall be painted with latex
coating system as specified in Section 09 90 00.
D. Trenching and Backfill: Trenching and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section
02 24 00, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL.
3.04 TESTING
A. Hydrostatically test all piping at system design pressure prior to backfill.
END OF SECTION

SWIMMING POOL PUMPS -22 51 16
SWIMMING POOL PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Pumps that will be used to circulate swimming pool or spa water including the following.
1. Base-Mounted End Suction Centrifugal Pumps.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pump and motor combination shall be non-overloading at all points on pressure-capacity

curve.
B. If equipment is approved which has different flow or pressure drop requirements than
schedule, contractor shall select new pumps with capacity and pressure capabilities
adjusted to maintain scheduled pump efficiency and requirements. Select pumps so that
the head-capacity curve slopes up to maximum pressure at shut-off. Contractor will
provide all additional or larger electrical components required by an approved pump having
greater horsepower than scheduled.
A. NSF 50 approved and listed for swimming pool and spa service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BASE-MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMP
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable Manufacturers: Marlow, Paco, or approved equal.
B. General Description: Cast-iron, bronze-fitted, end suction, centrifugal pump suitable for
application shown. Operating parts accessible without disturbing piping or motor
connections. For quiet operation, 175 psi w.p.
C. Pump housing: Cast-iron construction, flanged pipe connection, replaceable bronze case
wear rings, vertically split case, tapped gauge openings on suction and discharge nozzles.
Watertight mechanical seals for water temperatures up to 240oF. Venting petcock at high
point of volute.
D. Impeller: Single piece machined bronze casting. Trim to meet job conditions, diameter
less than 85% of largest impeller diameter accommodated in volute. Statically and
dynamically balanced. Single stage, closed type.
E. Shaft: Stress proof stainless steel, precision ground. Oversized to carry radial and axial
thrust.
F. Bearing Assembly: Completely removable assembly without disturbing motor, pipe

connection, or volute case. Ball bearing for above 10 HP. Special quiet operation up to
and including 10 HP pumps. Following options may be exercised by Mechanical Contrac-
tor.
1. Permanently lubricated and sealed rubber cushioned ball bearings similar to Fafnir
super quiet 'O' series. Mounted in heavy duty gray-iron frame.
2. Bronze sleeve type bearings. Oil lubricated with oil level indicator.

SWIMMING POOL PUMPS -22 51 16
G. Couplings: Flexible heavy duty type. Removable steel guard. Suitable for start-stop
operation.
H. Base: Heavy duty cast iron construction reinforced against deflection. Integral drip rim and
IPS drain connection. Grout holes. Base may be formed steel channel type without drip
rim.
I. Motor: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type. Motors 5 HP or smaller shall be ring type
mounted and suspended in rubber. 7-1/2 HP and over, foot mounted. Motor draw shall not
exceed nameplate horsepower at any point on actual impeller curve exclusive of motor
service factor. Oil lubricated bearings with oil level indicator. See Section 23 05 13 -
MOTORS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT.
J. Motor Controls: Provided hereunder as scheduled, refer to SECTION 23 05 14 - MOTOR

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT.
K. Capacity: As scheduled on Drawings.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine site to verify that mounting surface is level to within manufacturer’s

recommendations and equipment can be installed with sufficient access for maintenance
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Provide pressure gauge. Connect gauge to pump suction and discharge. Provide ball
valve at each connection.
C. Support piping and pump trim adjacent to pump so that piping weight is not transferred to
pump flange
3.03 ADJUST
A. Adjust coupling alignment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Start-up pump in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Take amperage reading

and turn off immediately if above nameplate value and report to Engineer.
C. Adjust to eliminate excessive noise and vibration. Check adjacent vibration isolators to
ensure that vibration is not transmitted to structure.
END OF SECTION

SWIMMING POOL WATER TREATMENT - 22 51 19
SWIMMING POOL WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Provide chemical disinfectant and ph control equipment capable of maintaining swimming

pool chemistry.
B. Provide independent systems for each pool including independent sanitizer and pH control
feed systems.
C. Provide all associated piping, valves, and accessories necessary for a complete and fully
operational systems.
D. Provide all necessary electrical wiring including both line voltage and low voltage necessary
for complete and fully operational systems.
E. Provide software and communications interface for remote monitoring.
1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. OAR 333-60 - Oregon Administrative Rules, Public Swimming Pools.
A. Pool systems shall be installed in accordance with OAR 333-60.
B. Pool Water quality shall be maintained within "Ideal Values" as listed in OAR 333-60-200,
Table-3.
1.04 SITE VERIFICATION
A. Site specific audits for water, equipment and environment shall be conducted by regional
factory trained and authorized personnel and submitted to the manufacturer for verification
of equipment sizing and operational defaults.
A. Apply and install materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Material shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the

manufacture of the products for at least 3 years.
C. All chemicals necessary to assure proper performance and operation of chemical treatment
system must be available from a local factory authorized source.
D. Factory tested before shipped to site.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. In addition to general warranty provide a 60-month manufacturer’s warranty for the pool
treatment system controller.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POOL TREATMENT SYSTEM CONTROLLER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: BECS Sys 3 to match existing.
B. Controller and Control Related Devices:

1. Integrated, microprocessor-based electronic water treatment control system.
Capable of monitoring and controlling pH, ppm chlorine, oxidation reduction potential,
and water temperature of a swimming pool or spa. Capable of calculating and
displaying Langelier Index (LSI) using either sensor data or manual input for pH,
temperature, total alkalinity, and calcium hardness.
2. Controller:
a. Capable of actuating all outputs in operator-selectable modes including: off,
manual, automatic, and time cycle. Adjustable deadband or proportional feed
control.
b. Enclosure: Nema Type 4X, lockable fiberglass cabinet with LCD graphic
display screen.
c. Factory set to water treatment industry standards. Operator adjustable.
d. Programmable high and low alarm levels for all control functions.
e. Continuous monitoring for failure of ORP and pH probes using dynamic flow
testing.
f. Seven-day program for automatic sensor cleaning.
g. Memory storage battery with minimum 6-month reserve power.
3. Sensing Probes: ORP and pH sensors shall be mounted in a see-through flow cell
with celar cover, pre-assembled with a water spigot and two ball valves.
4. Electrical: Factory-wired relay control assembly including timing relays and master
wiring terminal box mounted in a weatherproof enclosure and connected to the
controller enclosure by flexible conduit. All electrical power for monitoring and control
functions routed through terminal block.
5. Remote Monitoring: Systems module available allowing future connection to local
building management system workstation for system trending and alarm.
6. Remote Monitoring: Voice/data modem with alarm condition auto dial out for future
installation
7. Trend logging: Capable of storing 60 days of pH and HRR readings, alarm
conditions, setpoint adjustments, and feed event history. Data viewable for controller
display
8. Sensing probe assembly: Furnished by treatment system manufacturer.
C. Accessories Probe Rinse System: Packaged system pumping up to 10 gpd at 75 psi,

controlled by electronic timer
2.02 CHLORINE FEED SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pulsar Chlorination Systems or approved equal.
B. General: Chlorine feed system using briquettes consisting of 65% available chlorine
calcium hypochlorite with 0.4 to 0.6% scale inhibitor. Chlorine used shall provide even
dissolution rate for uniform chlorination of swimming pool.
C. Feed Tank: Structural base, chemical storage hopper, gasketed lid, feed engine, and
fluidizer assembly.
D. Injector Assembly:
1. Injector: Ram style venturi/eductor

2. Booster Pump (where scheduled): Close-grained cast-iron pump housing. Molded

Lexan impeller. Precision lapped, highly polished carbon-ceramic stainless steel
shaft seal between pump housing and motor.
E. Control Panel: NEMA 4X enclosure, front mounted enable/disable switch, high water level
alarm, indicator lights showing power status, alarm condition, and feed mode. Unit shall
control operation of industrial grade stainless steel normally closed solenoid operation valve
in response to input signal from pool treatment system controller. Solenoid valve will
automatically close when alarm occurs.
F. Capacity: As scheduled.
G. Overfeed Protection Repeat Cycle Timer: Provide for all pools or spas less than 10,000
gallons.
2.03 CARBON DIOXIDE PH CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Carbon Dioxide Feed System

1. Preassembled carbon dioxide feed system. Similar to TEK carbon dioxide feed
system.
a. All components mounted on corrosion resistant fiberglass base.
b. ¾ HP stainless steel booster pump and venturi.
c. Fiberglass NEMA 4X enclosure with CO2 flow meter, CO2 solenoid valve.
2. Provide CO2 regulator for each pool and spa.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Rack associated piping and wiring in neat and orderly manner. Locate where piping or
wiring will not be damaged or interfere with normal service access to equipment.
C. Provide shut-off valves and electrical disconnects as necessary to allow equipment to be

isolated for easy service.
3.02 CHLORINE FEED SYSTEM
A. Provide one chlorine feed system for each pool and spa.
B. Anchor unit base to floor with concrete anchor bolts.
3.03 CARBON DIOXIDE FEED SYSTEMS
A. Provide one CO2 feed system for each pool and spa.
B. Anchor unit base to floor or platform.
3.04 CARBON DIOXIDE STORAGE
A. Provide manufacturer recommended piping between tank and fill station.
B. Connect to existing CO2 supply manifold.

3.05 ELECTRICAL
A. Provide all wiring necessary to ensure proper operation and control of all equipment and
systems specified in Section 22 55 19 unless specifically shown on drawings or otherwise
specified. Wiring may be either line voltage or low voltage as required.
3.06 PROCESS PIPING
A. Provide all process piping necessary to ensure proper operation and control of all
equipment and systems specified in Section 22 55 19 unless specifically shown on
drawings. Piping sized to ensure process pressure losses do not exceed associated pump
or feeder capability at manufacturer recommended flows.
B. Piping:
1. Pool Water Piping: Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings. See Section 22 51 13 –
SWIMMING POOL PIPING
2. Chemical Feed Piping: Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings. See Section 22 51 13 –
SWIMMING POOL PIPING.
3. CO2 Piping: Type L copper. See Section 22 11 02 – PLUMBING PIPING
3.07 FACTORY VERIFICATION SUPERVISION, START-UP, TRAINING, AND PERFORMANCE

VERIFICATION
A. Factory authorized personnel shall verify that size and performance of pumps, venturis,
feeders, carbon dioxide storage tanks, and other equipment scheduled and specified
hereunder will provide chemical feed rates which exceed maximum pool or spa demand
under all conditions and feeder storage capacities will not require feeder refilling at
unreasonably short periods. Provide letter to Architect indicating that equipment is
satisfactory.
B. Factory authorized personnel to review proposed layout of equipment with Contractor prior
to installation.
C. Factory authorized personnel to inspect installation prior to start-up.
D. Factory authorized personnel to witness initial pool start-up and to adjust and calibrate
chemical treatment systems to obtain optimum performance.
E. Factory authorized personnel to provide 4 hours or operator training. Training to include as

a minimum.
1. Controller operations.
2. Controller operator interface.
3. Controller communication and alarms.
4. Controller PC software.
5. Sensor maintenance.
6. Chlorine feed system operation and maintenance.
7. CO2 system operation and maintenance.
END OF SECTION

SWIMMING POOL SPECIALTIES – 22 51 23
SWIMMING POOL SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Provide complete and operable pool water circulation, filtration, and heating systems
consisting of pumps, filters, heaters, piping, accessories, controls and all other equipment
specified and required herein.
B. Provide all labor, materials, and costs of installation not provided under other work, but
necessary for fully operational pool systems.
C. Provide independent systems for each pool including circulation pump, filters, heating
system, and piping systems.
A. Pool systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with OAR 333-60.
B. Pool equipment supports provided in accordance with Oregon Structural Specialty Code,
Chapter 16. See Section 20 05 48 – Seismic Control for Mechanical Systems.
A. Provide materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings
and specifications shall be referred to the Architect for resolution. Provide copies of
installation instructions to the Architect prior to commencing installation of any item.
B. The design and size of each item of equipment provided for this project, shall be of current
production and in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least five installations. A list of
installations shall be furnished to Architect upon request.
C. Material shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the

production of similar products for at least five years.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Filter tank hydrostatic test report.
B. Engineering drawing and calculations for filter tank structural support system stamped by
Registered Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MULTIUSE POOL FILTER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: National Line or approved equal.
B. Basis of Design: National Line Vertical Series
C. General: Pool water filtration system consisting of filter tank, filter media, manual four valve
face piping assembly, and backwash flow control valves. Configuration and piping
connections as shown on drawings. NSF listed for a maximum flow of 18 gpm per square
foot of filter area.

D. Filter Tanks: Vertical high-rate permanent media filter tanks. Complete with internal
distribution and collection system, automatic air bleed system. Fiberglass reinforced
vinylester resin shell manufactured to ASTM and ASME tank standards. Integrally molded
flanged influent and effluent connections. Designed for 50 psi working pressure with 6 to 1
safety factor.
E. Manways: FRP manhole with O-ring and integrally molded seat. Internally mounted.
F. Piping connections: 6-inch inlet and outlet flanged connections. Each tank provided with a
combination media dump port and drain. 3/4-inch vent and air relief valve on top.
G. Distribution and collection system: Upper distribution system and lower collection system
hydraulically balanced to prevent turbulence and displacement of the media during filtration.
ABS distribution lenses and laterals.
H. Structural supports: Integrally molded F.R.P. saddle support rated for seismic zone 4
requirements.
I. Filter Media: Minimum 1/8-inch uniformly graded, angular shaped, crushed silica sand, free
of limestone or clay. Grade #20, effective size 0.45 millimeter, uniformity coefficient of 1.5.
Removable through dump port.
J. Four Valve Face Piping Kit:

1. General: Packaged four valve system designed for control of floor mounted filter
system. Allows pump to remain in operation during backwash cycle initiation.
2. Similar to Nemato Corporation, EZE-Flow system.
3. 50 psi working pressure. Pressure drop not to exceed 2 psi.
4. Housing constructed of Fiberglass Reinforced Vinylester Resin.
5. PVC butterfly valves.
K. Backwash Flow Control Valve: Tamper proof backwash flow control adjustment. NSF
certified for 100 psi operating pressure. Similar to National Line Flow Control Valve
L. Accessories:
1. Pressure gauges: Provide two, 4-inch pressure gauges to indicate influent and effluent
pressures.
2. Backwash site glass.
3. All fasteners shall be stainless steel or cadmium plated steel.
4. Provide permanent label indicating system serial number, model number, operating
pressure, media information, and basic operating instructions.
M. Schedule: As shown on drawings.
2.02 INLETS AND OUTLETS
A. Floor Inlet Fitting (FI-1): Adjustable 2 inch floor inlet fitting. Cycolac body with internal
threads for pressure testing. Adjustable cover plate with set screw. Similar to STA-Rite 84
17-0000. Sized to match inlet piping.
F. Main Outlet 2 - Channel Drain (MO-2)

1. General:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: AquaStar or approved equal.
b. Single, unblockable suction outlet. Anti-entrapment cover. Similar to AquaStar
32-inch Channel Drain.
c. Virginia Graeme-Baker compliant.
d. Floor installation: 316 gpm at 3.9 fps.

e. Color: White
2. Sump: Three port manufactured sump; bottom 2-1/2 inch OD, 2-inch ID S/S; inside 2-
inch threaded FPT.
3. 2-inch hydro static relief valve, cast bronze body and valve plate complete, valve seat
gasket, stamped brass cover plate. Similar to Sta-rite #7017-0158. 2-inch collection
tube, similar to Sta-rite #7282-0013.
4. All covers, frames, screws to meet NSF 50/ASME/ANSI A112.19.8a-2008 national
standards and ASTM G154 UV Standards.
2.03 SWIMMING POOL VALVES
A. Valves: Acceptable Manufacturer’s: ASAHI/America, Viceroy or approved.
B. Butterfly Valve: 2-1/2-inch and Larger (Pool Water Service): PVC body, PPL disc. EPDM
liner. Lever operator 6-inch and smaller. Gear operator with position indicator 8-inches
and larger. 150 psi at 73°F. NSF listed. Provide stem extension on all valves located in
pool surge/level tanks. Provide mechanical stop where shown on drawings.
C. Ball Valve: ½-inch to 2-inch (Pool Water Service): Full flow port, PVC body, Teflon ball,
EPDM “O” ring seals. 150 psi at 73°F. NSF rated.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS POOL EQUIPMENT
A. Water Flow Meters: Plexiglass meter body, engraved calibration, ½ IPS polished brass
fitting and air valve mount directly to piping. 6” horizontal or vertical, 175-900 gpm. Similar
to Piro flow meter or approved.
B. Main Drain Balancing Valve: Modulating, float operated, wafer-style butterfly valve, flanged
connections. Polypropylene or equal corrosion resistant body and disc, 316 stainless steel
stem and float rod. Dual polyethylene float, adjustable stops. Similar to Environmental
Products Division, 2-0020.
C. Basket Strainers:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lincoln Equipment, Kenloch, or approved equal.
2. Fiberglass reinforced housing, see-thru acrylic lid, stainless steel drop away cover
bolts, 150 lb. flange connections. 18-gauge stainless steel basket with 1/8-inch
diameter holes. Total open area six times entering pipe area. Provide one spare
basket for each strainer.
D. Multi-use Pool Level Controls

1. Level controller: Float actuated multiport pilot type controller providing on/off hydraulic
signal to make-up water control valve. Five-foot stainless steel rod. Adjustable level
control range from four inches to 18 inches. PVC rod extensions and brass connectors
as required to meet application. Similar to Lincoln Equipment # 20-005.
2. Make-up water control valve: Hydraulically operated diaphragm type control valve.
Threaded connection. Similar to Lincoln Equipment Series 20.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Pool Filters:
1. Filter components which require servicing shall be accessible with suitable clearance
for inspection and repair and so that filter surfaces can be easily inspected and
serviced. Provide clearance to access filter tank manways.
2. Where filter backwash controller includes an interface capability to an associated flow
meter allowing flow rate to be read at the backwash controller, Contractor may omit the
meter flow readout device and connect to the backwash controller at his option.
C. Main Drains: Embed hydrostatic relief collection tube in 24"x24"x24" gravel sump below
each main drain.
D. Main Drain Balancing Valve: Adjust float position for 20% flow through main drains when
level tank is at normal water level and 100% flow through main drains when level tank is
empty.
E. Install level controllers for surge tank or level control tank application with wall mounting
bracket and switching mechanism outside of tank.
3.02 FACTORY SUPERVISION, START-UP, TRAINING, AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
A. Pool Filter
1. Field pressure test at 50 psig for 24-hours.
2. Factory authorized personnel to provide 8 hours of start-up and operator training
including field adjustment of control components, calibration and setup of
microprocessor, and operator instructions. Adjustments shall include but are not
limited to:
a. Filter flow rate.
b. Filter backwash rate.
c. Filter backwash frequency.
END OF SECTION

HVAC INSULATION – 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Piping Insulation
1. Glass fiber insulation.
2. PVC jacketing and fitting covers.
A. Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled

and experienced workers who specialize commercial insulation work.
B. Products shall have flame spread and smoke developed ratings based on test procedures
in accordance with NFPA-255 and UL 723. Rating shall be indicated on the produce or on
the shipping containers.
C. Unless otherwise specified, products shall have flame spread rating no greater than 25 and
smoke development ratings no greater than 50.
D. Specified k factors are at 100oF mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where
optional insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no
greater than that for the specified material.
A. Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered at the job site
must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and
description of the material.
B. All of the insulation materials and accessories shall be delivered to the job site and stored
in a safe, dry place.
C. If any insulation material has become wet in transit or job site exposure to moisture or
water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Glass Fiber Insulation (GF)

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Certainteed, John Manville, Knuaf, Owens-Corning.
2. Type: Preformed fiberglass insulation with factory applied vapor barrier facing.
3. Insulation: ASTM C 547 Type 1.
4. Conductivity: Maximum 0.25 btu-in/(hr-ft2-oF) at 100 oF mean temperature.
5. Jacket: ASTM C 1136
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: Pipe surface - 800oF, ambient - 150oF.
7. Basis of Design: John Mansville, Mirco-lok
B. PVC Fitting Covers and Jacketing

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Certainteed, John Manville, Knuaf, Owens-Corning.
2. Jacketing: 20 mil. PVC.

HVAC INSULATION – 23 07 00
3. Fitting Covers: Molded PVC snap-on type valve and fitting covers with precut or
molded insulation to match adjacent piping. Provide stainless steel tack fasteners,
vapor barrier mastic, and pressure sensitive tape as necessary.
4. Basis of Design: John Mansville, Zeston 2000 PVC
1. Moisture Barrier: Kraft or polyethylene.
H. Insulation Schedule
Temp. Range Insulation Run-outs Thru 1" 1.25" to 2.5" to 4" Over 4"
Piping Type Up to 2"
System 2"
Heating Systems 141-200 GF Note 1
(Heating Water) 105-140 GF Note 1
Note 1: Insulation thickness as required by Code.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified.
A. General
1. Pressure tests of joints and connections shall be completed and work approved before
application of insulation.
2. Surfaces shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale
and rust removed.
3. Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified piping systems including piping,
fittings, valves and accessories.
4. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in
a neat and professional manner. Insulation shall have smooth and even surfaces,
jackets and facings drawn tight, and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Finish all
exposed ends and other surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire partitions
and duct heaters.
6. Insulate piping individually.
B. Glass Fiber Insulation

1. Butt all joints firmly together. Seal all longitudinal joint laps and circumferential butt
strips. Seal all vapor barrier penetrations on cold piping with application of vapor
barrier mastic.
2. Fittings: PVC fitting covers with pre-cut fiberglass inserts. Completely fill fitting cover
with fiberglass inserts to level of adjacent insulation. Tape fitting joints. Seal seam
edges with vapor barrier mastic on cold piping.
END OF SECTION

HYDRONIC PIPING – 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Recirculated water piping for HVAC systems.
A. SECTION 23 20 02 – GENERAL HVAC PIPING PROVISIONS
A. Entire installation shall conform to B31.9 Building Service Piping.
B. Mechanics shall be skilled in their work or trade. Welders on pressure vessels or piping
shall show evidence of qualification in accordance with the ASME Code for Pressure
Piping, Power Piping, building service piping, and the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code. Each welder shall utilize a stamp to identify all work performed by the welder as
required. The Owner reserves the right to reject any personnel found unqualified in the
performance of work for which they are employed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 HEATING WATER PIPING
A. Piping: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black steel. Threaded ends and couplings, threaded
ends without couplings, square cut with plain ends, grooved ends for mechanical
couplings, or ends beveled for welding.
B. Fittings, Unions, and Equipment Connections:

1. Pipe Fittings
a. Up to 2 inches - ANSI B16.3, malleable-iron, 150 lb., black threaded.
b. 2-l/2 inches and larger - ANSI B16.9, factory-made, wrought-steel, 150 lb., butt-
welded fittings.
2. Unions and Equipment Connections:
a. Up to 2 inches – Threaded.
b. Greater Than 2-1/2 inches: ANSI B16.5, carbon steel fittings, socket welded or
butt-welded flanged fittings; 150 lb. Gasket compatible with flowing media and the
temperatures at which the system operates
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING
A. Instrument process piping to pressure gauges, pressure transmitters, and flow elements ¼-
inch stainless steel.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Piping, equipment, appurtenances and devices installed in professional manner in

conformance with the Specifications and drawings. Changes in direction made by
appropriate use of fittings. Approved provisions made for expansion and flexibility in water
piping. Arrange piping to drain to equipment, drain point, or as approved.
B. Piping Layout:

HYDRONIC PIPING – 23 21 13
1. Give special attention to appearance of complete installation.

2. Make provision for expansion and contraction during normal operation.
3. Do not obstruct openings or passageways.
4. Run parallel to walls of building.
5. Keep free of contact with building construction or installed items.
C. Cutting: Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, not from drawings.
D. Drainage: Arrange so that system can be completely drained.
E. Corrosion Protection: Wherever steel pipe is connected to copper pipe, or equipment

containing copper, bronze, or cupro-nickel, use di-electric unions properly installed with no
electrical path through connection.
F. Steel Piping
1. Threaded: ANSI B2.1, NPT.
a. Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies.
b. Ream ends of pipe after threading and before assembly to remove burrs.
c. Leave not more than three pipe threads exposed at each connection.
d. Use joint compound or thread tape on male thread only in making joints.
2. Welded: In accordance with ASME B31 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
3. Flanged:
a. Tighten flange bolts so that gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed.
b. Do not distort flanges.
c. Leave flange bolts with ends projecting 1/8 to 3/8-inch beyond the face of nut after
tightening.
4. Mechanical Joint:
a. Cut grooves clean and sharp without burrs or chuck marks.
b. Ream ends of pipe after grooving and before assembly to remove burrs.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Keep inside of all pipe and fittings clean and free from dirt and debris.
B. Thoroughly blow all lines before testing or placing in service.
3.03 INSPECTION
A. No piping covered or concealed until it has been first tested, inspected and approved.
END OF SECTION

HYDRONIC SYSTEM SPECIALTIES – 23 21 19
HYDRONIC SYSTEM SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Safety Relief Valves
B. Wye Strainers
C. Automatic Air Vents
D. Test Plugs
E. Automatic Flow Control Valves
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Flow Measuring Station: Provide valve schedule listing each station furnished along with
model number, line size, design flow, permanent pressure drop, and measurement
differential pressure at design flow.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES
A. Water Pressure Relief Valve (RV)

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bell & Gossett, Cash-Acme, Watts, Wilkins.
2. Description: Pressure safety relief valve for protection against excessive water
pressure caused by thermal expansion in hot or cold water service systems. Automatic
resetting
3. Construction: Nonmetallic disc-to-metal seating.
a. 2-inch and Smaller: Brass body, screwed.
4. Capacity:
a. Hydronic piping pressure relief: ¾ -inch, 1,400,000 BTU/hr at 80 psi set pressure.
b. Heating Equipment: Pressure relief capacities minimum of 150 percent of total
heating input rating.
5. Set Pressure:
a. Hydronic piping pressure relief: 80 psi or as shown on drawings.
6. Pressure Rating: 150 psi.
7. Temperature Rating: 300oF
8. Certification: ASME Section IV
9. Similar: Watts Series 174A.
2.03 WYE STRAINERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armstrong, Mueller Steam Specialty, Metraflex, Spirax Sarco,

Watts.
B. Description: Self-cleaning, wye type strainer. 125 psi minimum. Blowoff outlet. Free area
of strainer element four times pipe area. Strainer size to match pipe size. Removable
screen element. End connections to match existing connected piping system.
C. Closed, chemically-treated hydronic systems: Cast-iron body.

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Stainless steel wire screen, 20 mesh.
2. 2-1/2-Inch to 4-Inch: Stainless steel screen, .057-inch (1/16-inch) diameter
perforations.

3. 5-Inch and Larger: Stainless steel screen, 1/8-inch diameter perforations.
2.04 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Hoffman, Wheatly, Marsh, Paco,
Taco, or as otherwise listed.
B. Description: Automatic float operated type, working pressure 150 psi; stainless steel closed
float, non-corrosive seat and stem. Means to prevent back leakage of air. Connection size
1/2-inch or greater. Tapping at top for drip pipe connection. Similar to Bell & Gosset Model
87.
2.05 TEST PLUGS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Siscoe P/T Plugs, Pete's Plug, Waymire, or approved.
B. Description:
1. Body: 1/4-inch NPT, solid brass, 1/8-inch probe diameter.
2. Seal: Nordel for maximum 275oF service.
3. Cap: Cap with gasket when not in use.
4. Rating: 1000 psig.
2.06 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Griswold Controls, Flow Design.
B. General: Automatic flow control valve, factory set to maintain flow within 5% of specific
rate. 2-32 psi pressure drop operating range. Equipped with 2 pressure temperature ports.
C. Construction:
1. Internal wear surfaces nickel or stainless steel.
2. Internal flow cartridge equipped with machined threads to compensate for free spring
height without use of fixed shims. Permanently marked with gpm and spring range.
D. ½-inch to 2-inch: Brass Y-type or straight through body. Threaded connections similar to
Flow Design Model YR.
E. 2-1/2-inch and larger: Ductile iron body mounted wafer-style between 150 psi companion
flanges. Similar to Flow Design Model WS.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Safety Relief Valves

1. Pressure Safety Relief Valves: Install where shown and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe to nearest drain. Provide pressure relief
setting shown on drawings.
C. Wye Strainers:
1. Locate strainers in piping where shown on drawings and ahead of reducing valves,
automatic control valves and pumps.
2. Install as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Arrange for easy access.

4. Provide ball valve with hose end connection on blowoff outlet of hydronic system
strainers.
5. Provide globe valve on blowoff outlet of steam system strainers.
6. Provide pressure gauge. Pipe to strainer inlet and outlet. Provide ball valve at each
connection.
D. Automatic Air Vents: Provide automatic air vents at air separator vent connection and all
piping high points in the boiler room.
E. Test Plugs
1. Location:
a. Provide test plugs where shown on drawings.
b. Provide test plug immediately adjacent to each control system component that
senses temperature or pressure. For differential pressure transmitters, provide test
plug adjacent to both high pressure and low pressure sensing ports.
2. Arrangement:
a. Install so temperature probe and pressure gauge probe can easily be inserted and
removed with no obstruction.
b. Install so temperature and pressure gauges can easily be read.
END OF SECTION

LIQUID TO LIQUID HEAT EXCHANGERS – 23 57 19
LIQUID TO LIQUID HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Flat Plate Exchangers for Swimming Pool Service
1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ASME requirements for unfired pressure vessels.
1.03 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Provide manufacturers' data report for unfired pressure vessels, Form No. U-1 as required
by the provisions of the ASME Code Rules.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 FLAT PLATE EXCHANGERS FOR SWIMMING POOL SERVICE (HXSP)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: ITT Bell & Gossett, Model GPX; Ameridex Inc.; APV, Paraflow;
Baltimore Air Coil, Ener-Changer.
B. General: Complete factory assembled and tested heat exchanger including variable number
of gasketed heat transfer channel plates assembled in a pack, carrying bars, stationary
frame plate, movable pressure plate, compression bolts, and splash guard.
C. Plates: Stainless steel. Plate thickness suitable to operate with full operating pressure in one
channel and zero pressure in the adjoining channel.
D. Carrying Bar: Stainless Steel.
E. Frame Plate and Movable Pressure Plate: Corrosion resistant epoxy painted carbon steel.
Threaded or flanged connections integral to the frame or pressure plate.
F. Gaskets: Nitrile
G. Compression Bolts: Carbon steel.
H. Splash Guard: Removable, painted, carbon steel shroud designed to protect the plate pack
as required by OSHA.
3.01 SITE INSPECTION
A. Inspect site to verify that existing conditions are suitable for installation. Verify that mounting
pad is level and capable of supporting the exchanger. Provide adequate clearance for
required maintenance.

LIQUID TO LIQUID HEAT EXCHANGERS – 23 57 19
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install exchanger as shown and as recommended by manufacturer. Ensure adequate room for
disassembly and service. Arrange piping for easy service and access to valves, drains, control
valves, and other devices.
B. Provide drain valve with hose connection in piping at bottom connection.
END OF SECTION

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM – 25 10 00
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work hereunder includes a complete control system for control of pool temperature
including controller, sensors, and programming. Provide all necessary wiring including line
voltage and low voltage wiring as required. Work will include:
1. Standalone microprocessor based controllers.
2. Field Mounted Devices as specified in SECTION 25 30 00 – FIELD INSTALLED
CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
3. Communication, control, and power wiring as required.
4. Programming of control sequences.
5. Other materials and devices not shown as part of other work but necessary to provide
mechanical and electrical system control and monitoring sequences specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide manufacturer’s product data on controller and field installed control system
components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Reliable Controls or approved equal.
2.02 SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
A. System Controller: Programmable standalone controller. Digital input and output capability
required for application. Provide on-board or remote user interface to allow Owner reset of
pool temperature setpoint. Similar to Reliable Controls Mach-ProView LCD with SSL user
interface.
2.03 WIRING AND RACEWAYS
A. Provide wiring and raceways in accordance with Division 26.
B. All insulated wire to have copper conductor. UL labeled for 90 degree C service.
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceway parallel to building lines wherever possible.
C. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections in wiring to allow for vibration of piping and
equipment.
D. Install all equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by Chapter 1, Article 100,
Part A of the National Electric Code.

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM – 25 10 00
3.02 PROGRAMMING
A. Provide programming for the system as required to perform the sequence of operation.
See SECTION 25 90 00 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION. Provide all other programming
necessary for proper operation of the system but not specified including but not limited to
time delays, control deadbands, equipment interlocks, equipment sequencing, alarm
notification, and control sequences recommended by equipment manufacturers.
B. For systems using text-based programming, imbed comments in the programming code to
clearly describe each section of the program.
C. Contractor to provide time scheduling functions as specified in the Sequence of Operations.

Independent schedules shall be provided for each system, unless otherwise specified.
D. Contractor to provided alarming functions as specified in Sequence of Operations.

Contractor shall also configure alarming functions as directed by Owner including setting
alarm limits and differentials, states, type of notification, and alarm messages.
E. Contractor shall configure trending and functions as directed by Owner including trend data
collection and report format.
3.03 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING
A. Contractor shall completely test and verify specified control system performance. Compile
test results and include with written certification.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of control system to Engineer and Owner.
END OF SECTION

FIELD INSTALLED CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS – 25 30 00
FIELD INSTALLED CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Temperature Sensors and Transmitters
B. Relays and Switches
C. Automatic Control Valves
D. Actuators
1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Control Contractor to coordinate with other trades to ensure delivery and correct installation
of products furnished but not installed under this section. Coordination to include a review
of schedule, manufacturer’s installation requirements, and equipment locations. Such
products include but are not limited to the following.
1. Control valves.
2. Temperature sensor wells and sockets.
B. Control Contractor to provide all manufacturer’s product information including

recommended installation instructions to installing Contractor.
A. SECTION 25 10 00 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
B. SECTION 25 90 00 – AUTOMATIC CONTROLS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
1.04 INITIAL PROJECT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical product data for each component furnished
as part of the control system. Data shall include dimensions, capacities, performance
characteristics, electrical requirements, material finishes, and installation and start-up
requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Temperature Transmitters
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mamac, Precon, or approved Direct Digital Control System
manufacturer.
2. Sensing element: Thermister type, +/- 0.5oF from 32oF to 150oF accuracy, less than
0.25oF drift/year. Compatible with BMCS analog input requirements. Select sensor
with smallest range available that will span anticipated sensed medium temperature
range.
3. Well Sensor: Aluminum or stainless steel sensor sheath, sensor probe length suitable
for application. Brass or stainless steel thermal well rated to 250 psig and 250oF.

2.02 RELAYS AND SWITCHES
A. Current Status Switches for Constant Load Devices

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hawkeye or approved equal.
2. General: Factory programmed current sensor to detect motor undercurrent situations
such as belt or coupling loss on constant loads. Sensor shall store motor current as
operating parameter in non-volatile memory. Push-button to clear memory.
3. Visual LED indicator for status.
4. Split core sensor, induced powered from monitored load and isolated to 600 VAC rms.
Sensor shall indicate status from 2.5 A to 135 A.
5. Normally open current sensor output. 0.1A at 30 VAC/DC.
6. Similar to Hawkeye Model 908.
2.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belimo or approved BAS manufacturer.
B. General: Three-way type for modulation service.
C. Close-off Pressure Rating: Valve trim and valve actuator furnished to provide the following
minimum close-off pressure ratings
1. Water Valves:
a. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or
100% of total system pump head.
D. Water Valves:
1. Three-way Modulating 2-inch and below: Fully proportional, modulating ball valve.
Equal percentage flow characteristics. Brass body with nickel plating, stainless steel
ball, fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats, blow out proof stem, TEF ZEL characterizing
disc, stainless steel trim. 400 psi maximum rated pressure, 0-212oF temperature
rating, 100 psi close off pressure each port, 50 psi maximum operating differential
pressure. Rangeability 500 to 1. End position switches for normally open and normally
closed port.
2. Three-way Modulating 2-1/2 inch and above: Fully proportional, three-way mixing
globe valve. Linear flow characteristic each port. Bronze or stainless steel trim, bronze
replaceable seats. ANSI Class 125, cast iron body, flanged ends.
3. Sizing Criteria: Size valves to provide CV scheduled on drawings. If CV is not
scheduled, size valves as indicated below.
a. Three-way modulating service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop
through the associated heat exchange device, 5 psi maximum.
4. Failure Mode:
a. Heating Water Valves: Normally open.
2.04 ACTUATORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo or approved equal.
B. Proportional Electric Actuator

1. Direct coupled, spring return. Fully proportioning with ample power to operate valve or
damper against fluid pressures and mechanical friction.
2. Size to provide specified valve shut-off pressure.
3. 0 to 10 VAC or 4 to 20 mA input control signal.
4. 24 VAC supply power. Suitable for use with Class 2 wiring. Maximum 10 VA for AC
installations and 8 watts for DC applications.
5. Actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation circuitry to prevent damage to
actuator through entire rotation range.

6. Actuators shall initialize when actuator is powered. Initialization will determine stroke
length and enable actuator to set minimum and maximum limits of supplied control
signal to ensure use of entire control signal range. Feedback automatically adjusted to
the effective stroke.
7. Provide manual override and visual position indicator.
8. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures.
9. Globe Valve Service
a. Provide with automatic coupling device locking actuator to valve stem.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate field-mounted devices as shown on drawings and install per manufacturers

recommendations.
3.02 SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS
A. Hydronic System Temperature Transmitter:

1. Coordinate with Mechanical Contractor to ensure that associated temperature wells are
installed where required and located for optimum sensing accuracy.
3.03 RELAYS AND SWITCHES
A. Current Status Switches:

1. Provide current status switch to monitor status of all motor-driven equipment where
status is required.
2. Wrap power conductor through current transformer multiple times to amplify current
signal where required.
3. Provide enclosure adjacent to existing motor starter when space in starter is not
adequate to house current status switch.
3.04 AUTOMATIC VALVES
A. Install all slip-stem control valves with stem position no more than 60 degrees from vertical.
B. Locate to allow access and service. Ensure that actuator can be removed and services
without interference from structure of other piping and equipment.
3.05 ACTUATORS
A. Provide air gaps, thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or insulation if
required to ensure that actuator ambient temperature does not exceed actuator rating.
B. Actuator cords or conduit shall incorporate a drip leg if condensation is possible.
END OF SECTION

AUTOMATIC CONTROLS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS – 25 90 00
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Description of Control Sequences.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The control system will consist of all necessary devices and software to provide the
sequences of operation described herein.
B. Provide custom engineered BAS operating software to perform control sequences

specified. Sequence of operations describes major control functions, but does not limit
Contractor's responsibility to provide a fully operational automatic control system.
Contractor shall provide additional control functions not specifically described herein
including time delays, control deadbands, equipment interlocks, equipment sequencing,
alarm notification, control functions recommended by equipment manufacturers, or as
otherwise required.
C. All cascade control sequences and closed control loops shall have proportional-integral
action and derivative capability, except where approved otherwise. No fixed-interval
incremental resets are allowed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POOL HEAT EXCHANGER CONTROL
A. Provide temperature control for the existing lap pool and the new multiuse pool. Reuse
existing temperature sensors and pump status CTs already installed on the existing lap
pool. Provide new sensors for the multiuse pool.
B. Provide the following control and monitoring points

1. Multiuse pool circulation pump P-2 status.
2. Multiuse pool return water temperature.
3. Multiuse pool leaving water temperature.
C. Temperature Control: Operate pumps subject to Auto-On-Off switch at starter as follows.

1. For each exchanger, if associated pool main circulation pump status indicates pump
is operating, modulate heating water control valve to maintain pool return water
temperature at setpoint.
2. Provide maximum pool leaving water temperature high limit of 125oF.
D. Alarms
1. Provide a red warning light in the mechanical room notifying maintenance staff that
the pool return water temperature is more than 2oF from setpoint for more than 20
minutes.
2. Provide capability for future connection to dial out alarm for pool temperature and
main pool pump status alarms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install complete control system including all components, devices, and accessories
required to perform desired sequence of operation.
END OF SECTION

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL – 26 05 00
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. General electrical requirements specified in Division 26 apply to all work performed in
Divisions 26.
B. The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by any one, as affects this
Division, shall be as binding as if repeated herein.
C. Separation of this Division from other Contract Documents shall not be construed as
complete segregation of the Work.
D. Particular attention is called to Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders,
Supplemental Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Supplemental General
Conditions, Drawings and Specifications, and modifications incorporated in the documents
before execution of the Agreement.
E. Location of equipment on Drawings is approximate. Plan exact location with respect to site
measurements and work of other trades prior to starting work. If measurements differ
slightly, modify work. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect/Engineer and
Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to starting work.
F. Make minor changes in equipment connections and equipment locations as directed or
required prior to rough-in without additional cost.
G. Use of the word “Provide” shall be equivalent to “Furnish and Install.”
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General: Provide and install complete and satisfactorily operating electrical systems as
specified in this Division, as shown on Drawings, as required, and as reasonably intended.
Work generally includes, but is not limited to electrical distribution, lighting, devices, wiring
systems and control systems.
B. Omissions: Omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material necessary for
the proper execution of the work shall not relieve responsibility from providing such
additional labor or material.
1.03 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Examine Site of Work before making Bid and ascertain all related physical conditions.
B. Field verify scale dimensions shown since exact locations, distances and levels will be
governed by actual field conditions.
C. Owner will not be responsible for any loss or unanticipated costs which may be suffered by
the successful Bidder as a result of such Bidder's failure to fully inform itself in advance in
regard to all conditions pertaining to the Work and character of the Work.
1.04 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. Check Drawings of other trades to avert possible installation conflicts. Should major
changes from original Drawings be necessary to resolve such conflicts, notify Architect and
secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before installation is
started.
B. Check equipment connections and equipment locations on the job for coordination with
other Divisions equipment and connections, structure, and the like.
1.05 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Coordinate with Section 01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for submittal schedule
and routing requirements.
Veneta Multi-Use Pool 26 05 00 - 1 T017.02 (K018.01)

B. Procedures:
1. Engineer will require 7 business days for review of submittal documents including both
initial submittals and re-submittals. Upon written request, the Engineer may attempt to
speed the review process but has no obligation to do so.
2. Re-submittals
a. Provide re-submittals in a timely manner as required to maintain the project
schedule but no more than 10 business days after receipt of Engineers review
comment.
b. Re-submittals shall be complete substitutions of original submittals unless
specifically noted otherwise as a review comment on the previous submittal.
c. Clearly identify all changes made since the previous submittal.
d. The Engineer will provide one re-submittal review. If additional reviews are
required because of Contractors failure to submit a product that conforms to the
specification or if the submittals are incomplete, irrelevant, or inaccurate, the cost
the Owner of all Engineer’s added review services will be deducted from the
Contract Sum.
3. Submittal information must be provided regardless of whether the proposed item
matches the basis of design or is in exact accordance with the specification
requirements.
4. It is entirely the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all required submittals are
provided in a timely manner and as required to allow work to proceed in an orderly
fashion in accordance with the project schedule. The Engineer is not responsible to
notify the Contractor of a failure to provide the necessary submittals.
5. No item requiring approved submittal information shall be delivered to the site or
installed or any associated work performed until required submittals have been
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents by the Engineer. Any item
delivered to the site or installed without an approved submittal that is deficient in any
way shall be removed from the site without expense to the Owner. Any associated
work that must be modified in any way as the result of a deficient product shall be
performed without expense to the Owner.
6. Submittals must be approved by the Engineer and Owner’s Authorized Representative
if Owner review is required. Contractor to provide itemized listing of submittals for
review by Owner to determine which will be reviewed by Owner. Any substitutions of
products should be done at bid time and through Owner approved process.
Incomplete submittals or submittals not clearly identified as to product type and
proposed configuration will be rejected and required for re-submittal.
C. Product Evaluation Data
1. Provide product evaluation data submittals electronically within 30 days of contract
execution or as agreed at the pre-construction conference. Product evaluation data
shall be packaged by specification division and may be further divided by sub-
contractor. Multiple submissions or submission other than in one complete assembled
document per division per subcontractor is not acceptable with the following
exceptions.
a. Long Lead Item Submittals: Within 10 days of notice to proceed, Contractor shall
provide to Engineer a list of equipment and materials requiring early submittal
review to prevent project delay. Contractor may submit approved long lead items
prior to the general submittal package as they become available.
2. Product evaluation data shall be submitted as follows:
a. Each submittal shall be provided as a single file using a searchable Adobe PDF file
format or universally readable equivalent.
b. Any submittal information that is not clearly legible will be rejected without review.
c. Provide each submittal on a single read-writable CD-ROM for use in PC
compatible hardware.
3. Content
a. Product information not expressly required by the specifications will not be
reviewed.

b. Product data shall be provided in sufficient detail to establish conformance with

specified requirements. Where submitted literature includes multiple models,
features, or options, the specific models, features, or options proposed shall be
clearly indicated. Where a brief inspection shows that product data is not
complete, the submittal will be rejected without review.
c. Product data shall be clear, concise, legible, and relevant. Where product data is
not properly organized and contains significant information that is not relevant, the
submittal will be rejected without review.
d. Product information requirements will be listed in specific specification sections.
Required information may include but is not limited to:
i. Materials List: Provide tabular list of materials including specification
reference, specification product name, manufacturer, model/part number, and
size and/or quantity where appropriate. Do not include supplemental data,
except where specifically requested.
ii. Catalog data: Manufacturer’s standard product cut sheet.
iii. Product Data: Detailed data including dimensions, weight, materials of
construction, connections, and all other information needed to confirm that the
product conforms to all requirements listed in the individual specification
section.
iv. Performance Data: Capacity, input, output, flow, etc. as needed to confirm that
the product meets the performance requirements scheduled in the
specifications or on the Drawings.
v. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring diagrams.
vi. Shop Drawings: Construction drawings of items manufactured specifically for
this project including dimensions, construction details, weights, and additional
information to identify the physical features of the system or piece of
equipment.
vii. Installation Instructions
viii. Special Requirements Listed: Additional requirements indicated in individual
specification sections.
4. Format
a. Provide title page listing Project, Contractor, and Subcontractors.
b. Provide a table of contents organized by individual product indicating the
associated specification section number, section title, and page number where the
product specification appears.
c. Bookmark the electronic submittal file to match the table of contents.
d. For each product, provide an introductory information sheet including specification
section number, section title, and page number where product specification
appears. Provide contact information for product supplier.
e. Apply Contractor’s stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that the submittal has been
reviewed for compliance with the contact documents, is compatible with field
dimensions, and has been fully coordinated with associated work including
verification that the electrical requirements of submitted products match the
electrical service where the product will be connected. Contractor shall note any
deviations from the specifications or schedules provided on Drawings regardless of
how minor. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with unnoted
deviations regardless of submittal approval. Stamp shall include submittal number,
name of reviewer, and date of Contractor’s approval.
5. Review
a. Approvals, corrections, or comments made on the submittals or shop drawings as
part of the review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the
requirements of the plans and specifications. Approval of a specific item shall not
include approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.
b. Definitions: Comments indicated in the submittal review are defined as follows.
i. Approved: Approved indicates the product has been reviewed and has been
determined to be in general conformance with the intent of the Contract
Documents.
ii. Approved as Noted: Approved as Noted indicates that the product is accepted
provided that the noted revisions, clarifications, coordination, or confirmation is

carried out. A subsequent submittal of the product is not required and will not
be reviewed.
iii. Revise and Resubmit: Revise and Resubmit indicates the product is not
accepted. Contractor shall provide a complete re-submittal addressing issues
and providing additional information as noted.
iv. Submittal not Received: Submittal not Received indicates that a submittal for
the product has not been provided or reviewed. The notification is provided to
the Contractor as a courtesy. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide
specified submittals and to revise and resubmit them as required to obtain
approval prior to construction.
v. Incomplete, not Reviewed: Incomplete, not Reviewed indicates that the
submittal is largely inadequate and clearly does not provide the required
information. The submittal has been rejected without review. Contractor shall
provide a complete re-submittal in the correct format and including the
information required.
vi. Rejected: Rejected indicates the submittal is not correctly formatted or
contains significant information that is not relevant. The submittal has been
rejected without review. Contractor shall remove extraneous material from the
submittal provide a complete re-submittal in the correct format and include only
the information required.
A. Qualifications of Installers:
1. For actual fabrication, installation and testing of Work of this Section, use only
thoroughly trained and experienced personnel familiar with requirements for this Work
and with installation recommendations of Manufacturers of specified items.
B. Installation Criteria:
1. Conform Work with conditions shown and specified.
2. Where adjustments or modifications of Work are necessary for fabrication and
installation of items, or for resolution of conflicts between items, make such
adjustments at no added expense to Owner.
3. Submit adjustments or modifications of Work affecting functional or aesthetic design of
Work to Architect for review.
4. Pay for equipment relocations or modifications necessitated by failure to advise
Architect of conflicts or coordinate work.
C. Select equipment to meet design conditions stated. Contractor is responsible for meeting
technical data and performance requirements of system.
D. Satisfy requirements of regulatory agencies or codes having jurisdiction over project.
Provide U.L. labels for all equipment falling under testing capabilities of U.L.
1.07 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A. Make minor changes in equipment connections and equipment locations as directed or
required before rough-in without extra cost.
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Equal material of other manufacturer may be used following Architect's approval of a
written request submitted at least 7 working days prior to prebid date.
B. Products specified herein are so specified to establish a minimum level of product quality.
Except where indicated that no substitutions are allowable, equivalent quality products may
be submitted to the Architect for approval.
C. Substitution requests will not be considered unless they include the following:
1. Model numbers of proposed substitutions.
2. Options which are required to make the proposed substitutions comply with
Specifications.
3. Summary of modifications of the Work which are required to accommodate the
proposed substitution.

1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain a marked set of prints at job site at all times. Show all changes from contract
drawings, whether visible or concealed. Dimension accurately from building lines, floor or
curb elevations. Show exact location, elevation, and size of conduit, access panel and
doors, and all other information pertinent to the work.
B. At project completion, submit marked set to Engineer for approval.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warrant all work, materials, and equipment for one year.
B. During warranty period, remedy without delay or expense to Owner any defects providing,
in judgment of Engineer, that such defects are not a result of misuse or abuse on part of
Owner.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 THIS PART NOT USED
3.01 THIS PART NOT USED
END OF SECTION

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES – 26 05 19
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Wires and Cables
B. Wire Connections
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals for products listed in the Product Table below in accordance with
Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. Submittal requirements indicated
by column number designation as follows:
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
7. Installation Instructions
8. Special Requirements listed herein
PRODUCT TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Conductor and cable materials X

Twist-on connector X
Compression adapter X
Terminal, crimp on X
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver new wire to Site in new standard coils or reels with approved tag denoting length,
wire size, insulation type and manufacturer's name.
B. Protect from weather and damage during storage and handling.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MATERIALS
A. Building Wiring: 98 percent conductivity copper, 600-volt insulation, stranded. Type
THWN/THHN for interior dry and damp locations.
B. Branch Circuit Wiring: Conductors smaller than No. 12 AWG for power system branch
circuits not permitted.
C. Motor control wires shall be No. 14 minimum.
D. Wire for special areas shall be as specified on the Drawings.
2.02 TWIST-ON CONNECTOR
A. UL pressure-type, solderless, insulated, wound spring grip twist on connector.
B. Solderless pressure connectors for terminals, taps, and splices.

2.03 TERMINAL, CRIMP-ON

A. Flat, fork tongue, self-insulating.
B. For connection of stranded wire to screw terminals.
C. T & B "Sta-Kon," or approved equal.
3.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Make conductor length for parallel feeders identical.
B. Lace or clip groups of feeder conductors at distribution centers, pullboxes, and wireways.
C. Provide copper grounding conductors and straps. A ground wire shall be pulled through
conduits and used as the equipment grounding conductor.
D. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 100
feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet. Neutral
conductor shall be sized the same as corresponding “hot” conductors.
E. No shared neutrals. Provide one neutral for each phase conductor in branch circuits.
F. Wire and cable shall be brought to the job in the original containers bearing the U.L. label.
G. Install wire and cable in code conforming raceway.
H. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. UL approved type only.
I. Install wire in conduit runs after concrete and masonry work is complete and after moisture
is swabbed from conduits.
J. Couplings and conduit connectors shall have pre-insulated bushings in place before pulling
wires.
K. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes. Splice in feeders and services not
permitted. Splices or taps in branch circuits permitted only in junction boxes where circuits
divide.
L. Color code conductors to designate neutral, phase, and ground as follows:
120/208 OR
CONDUCTOR 120/240 277/480
Phase A Black Brown

Phase B Red Orange
Phase C Blue Yellow
Neutral White Gray
Ground Green Green
Switchlegs Pink or Tan Pink or Tan
Travelers Purple Purple
Fire Alarm Red
HVAC Control Green
Data/Telecom White (CAT6)

M. Wires shall be factory color coded by integral pigmentation. Colored plastic tape permitted
on No. 6 and larger where integral pigmentation impractical. Apply tape in spiral half-lap
over exposed portions in manholes, boxes, panels, switchboards and other enclosures.
N. All circuit conductors shall be identified with circuit number at all terminals, intermediate
outlets, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, motor control centers, etc. Both ends of a
given conductor shall be identified alike.
O. DO NOT install wires of different voltage systems in same raceway, box, gutter or other
enclosure.
P. Radius of cable bends shall not be less than 10 times the outer diameter of the cable.
3.02 CONNECTIONS AND SPLICES
A. Follow manufacturer's instructions using manufacturers recommended tools.
B. Stripping Insulation: Carefully strip, avoid nicking conductor. No "ringing."
C. Design: Connectors shall be designed and approved for the purpose used. Connectors
between aluminum and copper shall be listed "AL/CU" for the purpose of preventing
electrolytic action.
D. Bare Connectors and Conductor Free Ends: Wrap with insulating rubber or friction tape to
equivalent insulation of wire.
E. Ground Continuity to Metallic Surfaces: Remove any paint coating and polish surface
beneath connection.
F. Copper conductors may be terminated in any approved compression or mechanical
connector, including set screws.
G. No splices or taps permitted in feeder or branch circuit terminating in a single outlet.
H. Branch circuit splices and taps in junction and outlet boxes: Twist-on connectors.
I. Conductor and cable copper shall not be reduced at the terminal for making connections.
J. Slack shall be left at equipment, pullboxes, or outlet boxes to allow for a neat termination.
END OF SECTION

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 26 05 26
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Electric and power system grounding
1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Provide grounds in accordance with National Electrical Code and additional requirements
as required herein.
B. NEC references below are based on the 2014 edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
Grounding conductors X
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Size: Grounding Electrode Conductor: Table 250-66. Equipment grounding conductor:
Table 250-122.
B. Material: Copper.
C. Protection: Conductors not in raceway or concealed shall be insulated. Provide conduit
where shown or required for physical protection.
D. Bonding Jumpers: Same requirements.
3.01 POWER SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Circuit Grounding: Install grounding bushings, studs, and jumpers at distribution centers,
pullboxes, motor control centers, panelboards, and junction boxes.
B. Ground Connections: Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or clamps. If
surface is coated, the coating must be removed down to the bare metal. After the coating
has been removed, apply a noncorrosive approved compound to cleaned surface and
install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal, it shall be painted or
touched up.
C. Conduit Systems:
1. Ground all metallic conduit systems.
2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain a grounding conductor.
3. Conduit provided for mechanical protection containing only a grounding conductor,
bond to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 26 05 26
D. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install green grounding conductors with feeders and branch
circuits as follows:
1. Feeders
2. Receptacle outlets
3. Motors and motor controllers
4. Fixed equipment and appliances
5. Items of equipment where the final connection is made with flexible metal conduit shall
have a grounding wire
6. Additional locations and systems as shown
E. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:
1. Bond the grounding wires to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets, and other
enclosures through which the ground wires pass (except for special grounding systems
for intensive care units and other critical units shown.
2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination.
3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs for
terminating the ground wires.
F. Receptacles: Refer to Section 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES.
G. Ground lighting fixtures to the green grounding conductor of the wiring system when the
green ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit systems.
Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the
power wires from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.
H. Pool and Pool Equipment Bonding
1. All metallic parts of the pool structure, equipment, features, and deck shall be bonded
per NEC 680 using a #8 AWG solid copper wire.
2. Metal parts and fixed metallic equipment and structures shall be bonded to the
grounding system.
3. Provide a common bonding grid per NEC 680.
END OF SECTION

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 26 05 29
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Raceway Supports
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
Raceway supports X
Anchor methods X
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 RACEWAY SUPPORTS
A. Single Runs: Steel rod hangers, galvanized single hole conduit straps, or ring bolt type
hangers with specialty spring clips. Plumbers perforated tape or "J-nails" not acceptable.
B. Multiple Runs: Conduit rack with 25 percent spare capacity. Maximum width per
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Vertical Runs: Channel support with conduit fittings.
D. All hardware such as inserts, straps, bolts, nuts, screws and washers shall be galvanized or
cadmium-plated steel.
2.02 ANCHOR METHODS
A. Hollow Masonry and Framed Walls: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.
B. Solid Masonry: Lead expansion anchors or preset inserts.
C. Metal Surfaces: Machine screws, bolts, or welded studs.
D. Wood Surfaces: Wood screws.
E. Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors.
F. All anchors shall be removable.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Layout to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance, and to support equipment
loads required.
B. Exact location and spacing between supports per manufacturer's recommendations and
NEC requirements as minimum.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 26 05 29
C. Conduit shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent the collection of trapped

condensation. All runs of conduit shall be arranged so as to be devoid of traps wherever
possible.
D. Conduit risers exposed in wire shafts shall be supported at each floor level by means of
approved U-clamp hangers.
END OF SECTION

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 26 05 33
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Conduit, Tubing, and Fittings
B. Flexible Conduit
C. Electrical boxes and fittings as required for a complete installation
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code--Chapter 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
Outlet boxes X
Weatherproof outlet boxes X
Weatherproof junction and pull boxes X
Pull boxes X
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Conduit and Tubing: Galvanized steel rigid threaded conduit, electrical metallic tubing,
Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Flexible Conduit: Steel armor, flexible plastic jacketed type with liquidtight connectors
(liquidtight flexible metallic conduit).
C. Fittings:
1. General: Approved for purpose. Water, concrete tight where required.
2. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC): Threaded - no pressure type. Bushings with
factory insulated throat.
3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Connectors and couplings to be case steel.
Preinsulated connectors and couplings shall be compression, setscrew type. All
connectors shall have insulated throats. Connectors larger than 1 ¼-inch shall be
Thomas & Betts 200 Series insulating bushing.
4. Flexible Metallic Conduit: Clamp type, galvanized malleable iron with insulated throat.
5. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit: Continuous copper ground in core; approved
watertight.

D. Expansion Joints: Offset or sliding type with bending straps and clamps. Approved for
purpose.
2.02 TYPE
A. Utilize GRC in concrete with concrete-tight connectors or exterior with watertight
connectors.
B. Utilize electrical metallic tubing concealed in interior spaces or exposed in unfinished,
interior where not subject to physical damage.
C. Utilize surface metal raceways for exposed runs in finished areas. Paint to match wall
finish.
D. Make connections to motors and equipment with flexible metallic conduit or liquidtight
flexible metallic conduit. Use liquidtight type in damp locations. Minimum size 1/2-inch for
motor connections. Use 3/8-inch only for fixture and control wiring. Provide sufficient
length of flexible conduit to avoid transmission of vibration. Sizes not noted on the
Drawings shall be as required by the NEC.
E. Utilize schedule 40 PVC with rigid steel elbows and risers under slab or underground.
2.03 OUTLET BOXES
A. Minimum Box: 4-inch box, 1-1/2-inches deep. Provide raised covers on bracket surface
mounted outlets, plaster rings on flush outlets.
B. Flush Switch and Receptacle Outlets for One or Two Devices: 4-inch square box, 1-1/2-
inches or more deep, with single or two-gang plaster ring.
C. Three or More Devices at One Location: Use one piece gang boxes with device cover,
install one device per gang.
D. Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including
depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped
knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers
or wiring devices.
E. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting
brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps
for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting require-
ments of individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's option.
F. Outlet Box Plate Covers:
1. Flush Mounting: Bevelled, pressure formed, type 302 stainless steel, match device
installed.
2. Surface Mounting: Bevelled, steel, pressure formed.
2.04 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES
A. Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape
and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plate with
spring hinged waterproof cap suitability configured for each application, including face plate
gasket and corrosion proof fasteners.
B. Weatherproof boxes to be constructed to have smooth sides, gray finish.
C. Boxes used in contact with soils shall be cast iron alloy with gasketed screw cover and
water-tight hubs.
D. Weatherproof Plates: Cast metal, gasketed, for switches and receptacles provide spring
loaded doors.

2.05 WEATHERPROOF JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of the type,
shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and
equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.
2.06 PULLBOXES
A. Pullboxes and Junction Boxes: Sheet metal (indoors) or cast metal (exterior or damp
locations) construction, conforming to National Electrical Code, with screw-on cover.
B. Flush Mounted Pullboxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head retaining screws,
finished in light gray enamel.
C. Box volumes shall meet NEC for size and number of entering conduits.
3.01 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit concealed in all areas excluding mechanical and electrical rooms,
connections to motors, connections to surface cabinets, underfloor spaces, and above
suspended ceilings.
B. Owner review and approval is required for any conduit buried in slab on grade applications.
C. Owner’s FS Electrician(s) is to walk through the project to view pathways prior to
encasement or enclosure.
D. MC cable allowed for final connection to light fixtures from junction boxes.
E. For exposed runs, attach surface mounted conduit with one- or two-hole straps.
F. Size conduit for Type THWN/THWNN conductors. Minimum conduit size for home runs and
backbone conduit system is 3/4 inch. Individual branch circuits from backbone junction
boxes to device or fixture locations may be run in 1/2-inch conduit.
G. Coordinate installation of conduit in masonry work.
H. Conduits shall be filled no greater than 40 percent.
I. Install conduit free from dents and bruises. Plug ends to prevent entry of dirt or moisture.
J. Clean out conduit before installation of conductor.
K. Alter conduit routing to avoid structural obstructions, minimizing crossovers. Conduit routing
to remain clear of areas designated for other disciplines such as mechanical access ways
and valve access, close coordination with other trades is required. Bends and offsets shall
be avoided where possible, but when necessary shall be made with an approved hickey or
conduit bending machine. The use of a pipe tee or a vise for bending conduit will not be
permitted.
L. Provide UL approved expansion fittings complete with grounding jumpers where conduits
cross building expansion joints and for long runs where conduit expansion may be
excessive. Provide bends or offsets in conduit adjacent to building expansion joints where
conduit is installed above suspended ceilings.
M. Route all exposed conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
N. Allow minimum of 6 inches’ clearance at flues, steam pipes, and heat sources.
O. Vertical Runs: Straight and plumb
P. Raceways Running in Groups: Run at same relative elevation, properly spaced and
supported.
Q. Individual data/voice station outlets will be served by at least 3/4-inch conduit run from
nearby cable tray to station location that will be equipped with 4-inch-deep square box with
single mud ring.

R. In equipment rooms, run conduit on wall surfaces in a neat fashion as high on the wall as
possible.
S. Dissimilar Metals: Avoid contact with pipe runs of other systems.
T. Lengths and Bends: Maximum number of bends in any run shall be the equivalent of four
quarter bends (360 degrees total). Maximum length of any run shall be 300 feet, less 50
feet for each equivalent quarter bend. Junction and pull boxes shall be provided to
maintain these limits.
U. Provide waterproof seal for all exterior wall and underground raceway penetrations.
V. All empty raceways shall be provided with pull string or #12 conductor.
W. Conduit routing shall remain clear of areas designated for other disciplines, such as
mechanical access ways and valve access areas.
3.02 BOX INSTALLATION
A. Locate outlet boxes flush in areas other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and
above suspended ceilings.
B. Minor changes in the location of outlets from those shown on the plans shall be made
without extra charge if so direct by the Project Manager before installation.
C. For boxes mounted in exterior walls make sure that there is insulation behind outlet boxes
to prevent condensation in boxes.
D. Coordinate location and mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust outlet mounting height
to agree with required location for equipment served.
E. Locate pullboxes and junction boxes above suspended ceilings or in electrical rooms, utility
rooms, or storage areas.
F. Support: Secure boxes independent of entering conduits, by attaching directly to structure
with bar hanger, blocking or flat side bracket.
G. Identify each junction and pullbox with system description including branch circuit numbers
of enclosed circuits.
H. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all sheet metal outlet, junction, and pullboxes with
galvanized locknuts, and bushing.
I. Boxes are to be cleaned inside and out upon completion and prior to acceptance of work.
END OF SECTION

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 26 05 53
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Nameplates
B. Wire and cable markers
C. Pull box and junction box identification
D. Device plate identification
A. Identification shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC),
Articles 110-21 and as a minimum requirement.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
Engraved laminated plastic X

Adhesive film labels X
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates:
1. Three layer, black front and back with white core laminated plastic.
2. Engraved through outer layer to show white characters on black background.
3. Beveled edges.
4. Other colors as specified.
B. Wire and Cable Markers:
1. Heat shrink thermo-labels.

2. Brady or Panduit.
C. Labels:
1. Adhesive Film Labels: Machine printed, in black on clear background, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process.
2. Emergency receptacles/wall switches: Black on red background.
D. Panelboard Directory Card: Fiberboard neatly typed for newly installed panels. Circuit
changes to existing panels shall be noted on the directory card by hand printing in ink.
When more than five changes have been made on the directory card, a new card shall be
typed.
3.01 GENERAL
A. During finish construction, labeling is to be reviewed and approved by the Owner.
B. Zoned systems must be clearly defined and labeled.
C. Label at all entries into new spaces and/or through walls.
D. Covering or painting of any sign/label requires replacement.
E. Mark and label new wiring and place in tray. Include installation date.
3.02 NAMEPLATE INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or drive rivets.
1. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
2. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboards in unfinished locations.
D. Where switches control remote lighting or power outlets, or where switches in the same
outlet (two or more) serve different purposes such as lights, power, intercom, etc., or
different areas such as corridor and outside, furnish either engraved nameplates or
adhesive film labels with 1/8 inch black letters indicating function of each switch or outlet.
E. Use adhesive film labels for identification of individual wall switch and receptacle cover
plates.
3.03 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Labeling shall be non-destructible type which may not be removed during installation.
B. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboards, gutters, pull boxes, and at load
connection.
C. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits.
D. Tag lighting feeds with circuit number and panel ID.
E. Identify control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings.
3.04 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Identify all electrical distribution, control equipment and disconnect switches at loads
served.

B. 1/4-inch nameplates are to be fastened with sheet metal screws.

C. Disconnect switches and control units shall include circuit number and panel ID.
D. Letter Height:
1. 1/8 inch for individual switches and loads served.
2. 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification.
3. 1/8 inch identifying voltage rating and source.
3.05 PULL BOX AND JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide permanent signage, interior and exterior at all utility boxes, vaults, manholes, etc.
B. Install labels on inside of junction boxes and adhesive film label on the box cover.
C. Identify each junction box with complete system description. Examples:
1. Fire alarm.
2. Telephone.
3. 208 V system.
D. Methods:
1. Neat hand lettering with permanent black marker.
2. Engraved nameplates.
3. Adhesive film labels.
E. Locations:
1. On outside of box cover where concealed.
2. In exposed box locations, locate on inside of box cover.
3. Identify main pull boxes by number and indicate numbers on record drawings.
3.06 DEVICE PLATE IDENTIFICATION
A. 1/8-inch letter height.
B. Black letter color.
C. Location:
1. Bottom center of device plate for single gang and multiple gang outlets.
a. Provide branch circuit identification (example: “B-16” indicating panel “B” circuit
#16).
END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES – 26 27 26
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Wall Switches
B. Receptacles
C. Ground Fault Receptacles
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment (ANSI/UL467)
2. 498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles (ANSI/UL498)
3. C73 Series Dimensions of Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
B. Federal Specification (FS)
1. W-C-596D and E Specification for Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle and
Cable Outlet.
C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
1. WD 1-79 General Purpose Wiring Devices
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
E. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL)
1. UL-20 Standard for Snap Switches
A. Receptacles shall be Industry Class 5362.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, or approved.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
Switches X
Duplex receptacles X
Wall plates X

WIRING DEVICES – 26 27 26
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Switches: 120/277 Volt. AC Quiet, slow make, slow break design, toggle handle, with
totally enclosed case, rated 20 ampere, heavy duty, industrial grade. Provide matching
two-pole, three-way and four-way switches.
B. Duplex Receptacles: Full gang size, polarized, duplex, parallel blade, U-grounding slot,
heavy duty, industrial grade, rated at 20 amperes, 125 volts (unless otherwise noted),
designed for split feed service.
C. Wall Plates: Satin stainless steel, Type 302. Nominal .040-inch thick. Match device
configuration.
D. Nameplates: Provide engraved or embossed plastic nameplates for receptacles other than
standard duplex receptacles indicating voltage, phase, amperes, circuit and panel.
E. Color: Provide gray switches and receptacles in all areas.
F. Wiring devices with push-in terminals are not allowed.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install wiring devices of number, rating and type shown.
B. Devices to include appropriate outlet box, cover, wall plate and other necessary installation
materials for a complete operating outlet.
C. Mount switches 48 inches (to top of box) above floor except as otherwise noted on the
Drawings.
D. Coordinate switch mounting location with architectural detail.
E. Mount receptacles vertically at 15 inches (to bottom of box) above finished floor, with
grounding pole at bottom. Verify exact height and orientation of outlets with Architectural
Details prior to rough-in.
F. Back wiring wells may be used for receptacles.
G. Where outlets are adjacent to each other at same mounting heights, install under common
device plate, except where outlet are of different voltages, such as telephone and duplex
receptacles, unless otherwise noted.
H. Grounding: Install a separate green or bare wire between the receptacle strap grounding
(green) screw and a screw into the outlet box. Self-grounding strap not approved as
grounding means.
END OF SECTION

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES – 26 28 16
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Fuses
B. Circuit Breakers
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. C37.16 Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations
for Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit Protectors.
2. C37.17 Trip Devices for AC and General-Purpose DC Low-Voltage Power Circuit
Breakers.
3. C97.1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 600 Volts or Less.
B. Federal Specifications (FS)
1. W-C-375B/GEN Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service, Federal
Supply Classification (FSC) 5925.
2. W-C-375/(1 through 20) Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service
(FSC) 5925.
3. W-F-1814 Fuse Cartridge, High Interrupting Capacity. (FSC) 5920.
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
1. 20-73 Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures (ANSI C37.13- 73).
D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
1. FU-1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
1.03 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS
A. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
1. UL 489-72 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
2. UL 198 E Class R Fuses
3. UL 198.2 High Interrupting - Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Type
4. UL 869 Service Disconnects
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
8. Special Requirement listed herein.
Fuses X
Molded case circuit breakers X

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES – 26 28 16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FUSES
A. Feeder, Branch Circuit and Service Entrance Fuses: 600 amperes and below, UL Class J
or RK1 current limiting type, 600 volt 200,000 ampere interrupting capacity.
B. Motor and Inductive Circuit Fuses: UL class RK5 time delay current limiting type, 600 volt,
200,000 ampere interrupting capacity.
C. Control Circuit Fuses: UL Class J or R current, limiting type, 600V.
2.02 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breakers:
1. Connection to Bus: Bolt-on
2. Thermal-magnetic, molded case, with inverse time current overload and instantaneous
magnetic tripping unless otherwise shown.
3. Quick-make, quick-break, with tripped indication clearly shown by breaker handle
taking a position between ON and OFF.
4. Multi-pole breakers shall have a common internal trip. No handle ties between single
pole breakers.
5. Contacts: T-rated, for heavy duty switching applications
6. Breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of
not more than 10 times the breaker trip rating to prevent repeated arcing shorts
resulting from frayed appliance cords.
7. Additions to existing panelboards and switchboards shall match or be compatible with
existing.
8. Provide handle ties per NEC for breakers serving circuits with shared neutral
conductors.
9. Where used as service disconnects, breakers shall be listed for use as service
entrance equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FUSE INSTALLATION
A. Label each switch to indicate type and rating of fuse installed.
B. All fuses shall be selected to provide selective system coordination.
C. Provide 10% (3 minimum) spare fuses of each size and rating used.
3.02 CIRCUIT BREAKER INSTALLATION
A. Label each breaker located in switchboard or separate enclosure to indicate load served.
B. Adjust settings on breakers to operate properly under actual field conditions and to provide
selective system coordination.
C. Update directory in panelboards which have new breakers installed.
END OF SECTION

MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS – 26 29 13
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Provide and install motor disconnects as shown and as required by Code.
B. Provide and install circuit disconnects as shown and as required by Code.
C. Disconnects to include mounting stands, brackets, plates, supports, and required hardware
and accessories for complete installation.
A. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL)
1. Annual Product Directories
2. UL-98 Enclosed Switches
B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
1. NEMA KS-1 Enclosed Switches
A. Conform to National Electrical Code and to applicable inspection authority.
B. Provide circuit and motor disconnects in the proper enclosure as required by NEC for the
location installed unless more stringent requirements otherwise noted on the Drawings or
herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Section 26 01 26 - Submittals. Submittal requirements indicated by column number
designation as follows:
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
Components
Single Phase Manual Motor Controller
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory label.
B. Three-Phase Disconnect Switches: Three-pole heavy duty quick make, quick break 600
volt. Number of poles and ampacity as noted or required by Code. Fusible where noted
with fuse clips suitable for dual element fuses unless current limiting fuses are noted. Short
circuit rating sufficient to withstand the available fault current or let-through current before
the fuse melts without damage or changes in rating.
C. Compression or set-screw lugs approved for use with copper wire.
D. ON/OFF Positions: Clearly marked, lockable in "OFF" position.

MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS – 26 29 13
E. Cover Interlock:
1. Prevents switch from being opened when "on."
2. Prevents closing switch when cover is open.
3. Defeater to permit authorized personnel to open door and inspect switch when "on," or
operate with cover open.
F. Motor disconnects shall contain minimum 2 NO/NC control circuit disconnecting contacts
interlocked with operating handle.
G. Enclosure for Dry, Indoor Locations: NEMA 1 minimum. Enclosures for outdoor locations:
NEMA 3R minimum. Others as required for location installed.
2.02 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLER, SINGLE PHASE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D.
B. General: Manual toggle switch with handle guard and lockoff, thermal overload relay,
NEMA 1 surface mounted enclosure. Square D, Class 2510 or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor and circuit disconnects as recommended by manufacturer and as required by
Code and UL.
B. Maintain Code clearances.
C. Provide a nameplate on each motor and circuit disconnect identifying the equipment item
served. Where disconnect is to be installed in existing motor control center replace existing
nameplate with new nameplate identifying new equipment item served.
END OF SECTION

LIGHTING FIXTURES – 26 51 00
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This Section includes supply and installation of luminaires, supports and accessories; and
supply of plaster frames, trim rings and backboxes for plaster, tile, drywall or concrete
ceilings.
B. Provide and install lamps in all light fixtures. Refer to lighting fixture schedule.
A. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
1. NEMA LE1: Fluorescent Luminaires
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Confirm compatibility and interface of other materials with luminaire and ceiling system.
Report discrepancies to the Engineer/Architect, and defer ordering until clarified.
B. Supply plaster frames, trim rings and backboxes to other trades.
C. Coordinate with Division 23 to avoid conflicts between luminaires, supports, fittings, and
mechanical equipment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials List
2. Catalog Data
3. Product Data
4. Performance Data
5. Wiring Diagrams
6. Shop Drawings
8. Special Requirement listed herein.
Ballasts
Exterior Poles
HID lamps
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Fixture Schedule.

2.02 BALLASTS
A. HID Ballasts
1. Metal halide, pulse start
a. -40 degrees F minimum lamp starting temperature.
b. Operation input frequency 50/60 Hz
c. Lamp current crest factor of 1.6
d. Constant Wattage multitap auto transformer (CWA) type
e. No PCBs
f. 5 year warranty and $10 labor allowance
g. UL listed
h. Acceptable Products: Venture Lighting, Advanced, Sylvania, or approved
2.03 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Enclosures: Complete with gaskets to form weathproof assembly.
B. Provide low temperature ballasts, which will start reliably at temperatures as low as 0°F.
C. Provide site lighting fixtures with grounding lugs to ground both pole (when provided) and
fixture.
2.04 LIGHTING POLES
A. Square.
B. Aluminum
C. Anchor base.
D. Factory prime paint and finished. Coordinate finish color with Architect.
E. Wind Load: 100 mph velocity, with luminaires and brackets mounted.
F. Hand Hole:
1. Standard size and location as provided by manufacturer.
2. Provide matching gasketed cover plate.
G. Pole Top: Slipfitter as required.
H. Anchor Bolts: As recommended by pole manufacturer. Provide template, flat washers, lock
washers and hex nuts for each pole.
2.05 LAMP TYPE AND COLOR
A. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule.
B. All lamps of each type and color shall be by the same manufacturer.
2.06 HID LAMPS
A. Metal Halide: Pulse start, coated, 88 CRI, 4200K color temperature
B. Acceptable manufacturers: GE, Philips, Osram Sylvania

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Luminaire Pole Bases:
1. Size and constructed as indicated on Drawings.
2. Project anchor bolts 2 inches minimum above base.
3. Install poles plumb on bases.
4. Grout around pole bases.
B. Use belt slings or non-chafing ropes to raise and set pre-finished luminaire poles.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean field painted lighting fixtures, poles, etc., prior to application of paint.
B. Ensure finished surfaces of pole base tops smooth and relatively level prior to application of
lighting fixture poles. Make final adjustments to plumb poles with leveling nuts.
3.03 CLEAN-UP
A. At time of acceptance, fixtures and lamps shall be clean, with visible labels removed.
Touch-up any blemishes.
B. Remove ballast leakage and dispose of cleaning materials in accordance with EPA
regulations.
3.04 FIXTURES AS RACEWAYS
A. Code Reference: NEC 410-31
B. Through-Wiring: In continuous rows of fluorescent lighting, a connection to a single point in
the row indicates that the branch circuit conductors are to be routed through the fixture
wiring compartments and a connection made to each ballast.
3.05 LAMP INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.06 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 10% extra lamps of all types, based on initial lamping quantity: Where a fraction
occurs, round up to next larger integer.
3.07 BURNOUT REPLACEMENT
A. Make replacements from extra stock as required until 90 days after Substantial Completion
date. Deliver remaining lamps to Owner.
END OF SECTION

EARTH MOVING - 31 20 00
EARTH MOVING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preparing subgrades.
B. Excavating and backfilling for pool.
C. Backfill and bedding for subdrainage system.
D. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Independent testing agency.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
C. Section 33 41 00 - Subdrainage.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 288-2000 - Geotextile Specifications.
B. ASTM D 448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction.
C. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort.
D. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method.
E. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort.
F. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil Placed by the Rubber
Balloon Method.
G. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System).
H. ASTM D 2940 - Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for
Highways or Airports.
I. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity.
J. ASTM D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles.
K. ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles.
L. ASTM D 4759 - Standard Practice for Determining the Specification Conformance of
Geosynthetics.
M. ASTM D 4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles,
Geomembranes, and Related Products.
N. ODOT - Oregon Department of Transportation.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow
of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation
and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions changes in the
Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines
and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within buildings.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated.
B. Site Information: Research public utility records and verify existing utility locations prior to ordering
any material. Notify the Architect immediately if any discrepancies are found in the project survey.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available
from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a
combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Select Fill: ¾ inch or 1 inch minus, clean, well graded, crushed gravel or rock.
E. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve or use ODOT
3/4-inch - 0-inch BASE AGGREGATE.
F. Drainage Course: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

G. Backfill and Fill:

1. Satisfactory soil materials.
2. Initial Trench Backfill: Use ODOT 19.0mm - 0mm (3/4-inch - 0-inch) base aggregate.
3. Final Trench Backfill: Refer to Select Fill.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of the utility.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, freezing temperatures or frost, and other
hazards created by earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.
B. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Perform excavations only in dry weather. Do not excavate saturated materials.
B. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide ample and suitable pumps and accessories with
which to promptly remove and dispose of water.
C. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.03 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate
by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required
lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than
top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: As indicated.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects
along trench subgrade.

3.05 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete
fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by
Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.
3.06 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.07 BACKFILL AND FILLS
A. Backfill: Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the
following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing,
and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Remove if not used.
7. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
8. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
3.08 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or
ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
3.09 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILL AND FILL
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698:
1. Under pool structures, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade
and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under decks, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact
each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.
3.10 BASE COURSES
A. Place base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

2. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
00.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies:
E. Frequencies of testing in subparagraphs below are examples only. Revise to suit Project.
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at
least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in
no case fewer than three tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100
feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfill have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill
with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.13 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
3.14 PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
A. Under Footings and Pool Bottom:
1. 4 inch thick Select Fill, compacted to minimum 95 percent maximum dry density per ASTM D
698.
2. Compact subgrade to minimum 95 percent maximum dry density per ASTM D 698.
B. Under retaining wall footing:
698.

C. Under Slabs-on-Grade:
698.
END OF SECTION

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES - 32 31 13
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.
B. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts.
C. Modification and extension of existing fence system.
A. Section 01 23 00 - Alternates: Description of Alternates.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts.
C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
B. ASTM A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2011a.
C. ASTM F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2011.
D. ASTM F1083 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions,
hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Posts, Rails, and Frames: ASTM F1083 Schedule 40 hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe, welded
construction, minimum yield strength of 30 ksi.
B. Wire Fabric: ASTM A392 zinc coated steel chain link fabric.
C. Concrete: Type specified in Section 03 30 00.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Line Posts: 1.9 inch diameter.
B. Corner and Terminal Posts: 2.38 inch.
C. Gate Posts: 3.5 inch diameter.
D. Top and Brace Rail: 1.66 inch diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled.
E. Gate Frame: 1.66 inch diameter for welded fabrication.

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES - 32 31 13
F. Fabric: 2 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, 6 gage, 0.1620 inch thick, top selvage knuckle end
closed, bottom selvage twisted tight.
G. Tension Wire: 6 gage, 0.1620 inch thick steel, single strand.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.
B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel.
C. Privacy Slats: Vinyl strips, sized to fit fabric weave, black color .
2.04 FINISHES
A. Components and Fabric: Vinyl coating, black color as selected over coating of 1.8 oz/sq ft
galvanizing.
B. Hardware: Hot-dip galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567.
B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails.
C. Set intermediate, terminal, and gate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches
above finish grade or as indicated on Drawings. Slope top of concrete for water runoff.
D. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and
diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.
E. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch long rail sleeves.
F. Install center brace rail on corner gate leaves.
G. Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured 28 days.
H. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet maximum, whichever is less.
I. Position bottom of fabric 5 inches above finished grade.
J. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15
inches on centers.
K. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.
L. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts.
M. Ground fence in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch.
C. Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines.
END OF SECTION

SUBDRAINAGE - 33 41 00
SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Under-Slab and Pool Drainage Systems.
A. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving: Excavation and fill.
A. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe drainage products and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout of piping, high and low points of pipe inverts,
gradient of slope between corners and intersections, and pipe sizes.
D. Project Record Documents: Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts and principal
invert elevations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIALS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ASTM D2729; plain end, 4 inch inside diameter; with required fittings.
B. Use perforated pipe at subdrainage system; unperforated through sleeved walls.
2.02 AGGREGATE AND BEDDING
A. Filter Aggregate and Bedding Material: Fill Type Drainage Course as specified in Section 31 20
00.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Pipe Couplings: Solid plastic.
B. Filter Fabric: Water pervious type, black Drainage Fabric specified in Section 31 20 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as
indicated on layout Drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over-excavation with crushed rock.
B. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage drainage piping or impede
consistent backfilling or compaction.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install and join pipe and pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place drainage pipe on clean cut subsoil.

SUBDRAINAGE - 33 41 00
C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on Drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch
in 10 feet.
D. Place pipe with perforations facing down. Mechanically join pipe ends.
E. Install pipe couplings.
F. Install filter aggregate at sides, over joint covers and top of pipe. Provide top cover compacted
thickness of 12 inches.
G. Place filter fabric over levelled top surface of aggregate cover prior to subsequent backfilling
operations.
H. Place aggregate in maximum 4 inch lifts, consolidating each lift.
I. Connect to storm sewer system with unperforated pipe .
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection and testing.
B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation begins.
END OF SECTION

DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEM - 33 42 00
DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Deck drain drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
B. Connection of new drainage system to existing system.
A. Section 02 41 00 - Demolition: Removal of existing concrete deck to expose drainage system.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: New concrete deck and trench drain support.
C. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving: Trenching and backfill.
A. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2014.
B. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories, and trench drain.
C. Project Record Documents:
1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, and invert elevations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2729, Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of 4 and
6 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.
2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required
tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
2.03 CATCH BASIN, TRENCH DRAIN, CLEANOUT, AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS
A. Area Drain:
1. Type: Coated cast-iron drain; two piece body with double drainage flange; invertible
non-punching flashing collar, weep hoes, bottom outlet and adjustable; satin nilaloy 5-inch
round strainer.
2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Product:
a. Josam series 30000-S by Josam Company: www.josam.com.
B. Trench Drain: Complete system with corner sections.
1. Type: PVC channel drain with inverse flying buttress design, bottom flange and honeycomb
reinforced walls, structural foam polyethylene grate; 6 feet and 2 inch outlets lengths, UV
inhibitor.
2. Open Area: 11.3 sq in/ft.
3. Grate: Non-slip segmented PVC; gray color.
4. Product:
a. NDS Mini Channel, Part No. 500 with No. 541 Grate by NDS: www.ndspro.com.

DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEM - 33 42 00

2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 20 00.
B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 20 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
A. See Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving.
B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete
backfilling.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as
indicated on layout drawings.
B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
watertight.
1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D2321.
C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of
1/8 inch in 10 feet.
D. Connect to existing storm drainage system.
3.03 INSTALLATION - AREA DRAINS AND TRENCH DRAINS
A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.
B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sewer pipe end sections.
C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.
D. Prefabricated trench drains:
1. Excavate; prepare substrate and supports according to the manufacturer's printed installation
instructions.
2. Install prefabricated trench drain system according to the manufacturer's printed installation
instructions.
3. Expansion, Construction, and Control Joints: Do not locate trench drain system on an
expansion, construction or control joint in concrete or pavement. Where concrete or
pavement joints running transverse to direction of flow cross the trench drain system, locate
concrete or pavement joints and trench drain system joints so that both coincide.
4. Concrete Trench Support: 3000 pounds per square inch compressive strength, minimum.
a. Provide support on all sides of trench in minimum thickness recommended by trench
drain system manufacturer.
b. Screed and finish top edge of concrete flush with top surface of trench drain system.
c. Do not use secondary edge finishing tools.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
END OF SECTION

Veneta Multi-Use Pool Project Manual 5-19-17 1

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Veneta Multi-Use Pool Project Manual 5-19-17 1

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

PROJECT MANUAL FOR:

VENETA MULTI-USE POOL

MAY 19, 2017

PROJECT TITLE PAGE

PROJECT MANUAL FOR:

VENETA MULTI-USE POOL

SYSTEMS WEST ENGINEERS, INC.

JUNE 19, 2017

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 01 01 - 1

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 01 10 - 1

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 01 10 - 2

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 01 10 - 3

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 01 15 - 1

BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 11 16 - 1

Asbestos work is not anticipated.

RIGHT TO REJECT PROPOSALS

Kyle Schauer, Public Works Director

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 11 16 - 2

No prequalification will be required for this Project.

Before submitting a bid, each bidder must:

(a) Examine the contract documents thoroughly;

3. Instructions for First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure

(a) The subcontractor’s name,

(c) The dollar value of the subcontract.

4. The Importance of Bids and Contract Documents

5. Requests for Clarification/Addenda

6. Performance and Payment Bonds

7. City Investigation of Bidder

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 21 13 - 2

8. Registration and Licenses

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 21 13 - 3

AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION

EXISTING REPORTS AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

END OF AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 31 00 - 1

Project Title: Veneta Multi-Use Pool

Owner's Name: City of Veneta

RECEIPT OF BIDS AND FIRST TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE STATEMENT

First Tier Subcontractor

Oregon CCB # CCB Expiration date:

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 41 00 - 1

_____ b. A Partnership registered under the laws of the State of _____________; or

_____ d. An individual doing business under his or her own name;

Robertson/Sherwood/Architects pc for a Base Bid of $___________________;

and the Undersigned agrees to be bound by the following documents:

Advertisement for Bids

NO. DESCRIPTION ADD

Alternate No. 1: Expanded Deck and Fencing $____________

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 41 00 - 2

OVERHEAD AND PROFIT

____ The Bidder is a resident of the State of Oregon.

____ The Bidder is a non-resident of the State of Oregon as defined below.

Bidder's State of Residence: ________________________________

Preference Discount given by Bidder's Residence State: __________________%

OREGON TAX LAWS

BID SECURITY FORFEITURE

Veneta Multi-Use Pool 00 41 00 - 3

_ b. A Partnership registered under the laws of the State of _________; or

Phone: _ Fax: _